Contents
Safety information.........................................................................................7
Conventions...........................................................................................................................................................7
Learning about the printer...........................................................................9
Finding information about the printer.............................................................................................................9
Selecting a location for the printer................................................................................................................ 10
Printer configurations........................................................................................................................................12
Understanding the basic functions of the scanner....................................................................................13
Using the ADF and scanner glass..................................................................................................................14
Understanding the printer control panel................................................. 15
Using the printer control panel.......................................................................................................................15
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights......................................................15
Understanding the home screen................................................................................................................... 16
Using the touch-screen buttons.....................................................................................................................18
Setting up and using the home screen applications............................. 20
Finding the IP address of the printer........................................................................................................... 20
Finding the IP address of the computer......................................................................................................20
Accessing the Embedded Web Server....................................................................................................... 20
Customizing the home screen........................................................................................................................21
Understanding the dierent applications.................................................................................................... 21
Activating the home screen applications....................................................................................................22
Finding information about the home screen applications................................................................................22
Setting up Forms and Favorites .............................................................................................................................. 22
Setting up Card Copy................................................................................................................................................. 23
Using MyShortcut........................................................................................................................................................ 23
Setting up Multi Send................................................................................................................................................. 24
Setting up Scan to Network...................................................................................................................................... 24
Setting up Remote Operator Panel.............................................................................................................. 25
Exporting and importing a configuration.................................................................................................... 26
Additional printer setup.............................................................................27
Installing internal options................................................................................................................................ 27
Installing hardware options.............................................................................................................................46
Attaching cables................................................................................................................................................49
Contents 2
Setting up the printer software.......................................................................................................................51
Networking..........................................................................................................................................................52
Verifying printer setup......................................................................................................................................57
Loading paper and specialty media.........................................................58
Setting the paper size and type.................................................................................................................... 58
Configuring Universal paper settings.......................................................................................................... 58
Loading the 550‑sheet tray............................................................................................................................58
Loading the 2100‑sheet tray.......................................................................................................................... 68
Loading the multipurpose feeder..................................................................................................................75
Linking and unlinking trays..............................................................................................................................81
Paper and specialty media guide............................................................. 83
Using specialty media......................................................................................................................................83
Paper guidelines................................................................................................................................................85
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights...............................................................................................88
Printing.........................................................................................................94
Printing a document..........................................................................................................................................94
Printing from a mobile device........................................................................................................................95
Printing from a flash drive............................................................................................................................... 96
Printing confidential and other held jobs....................................................................................................98
Printing information pages..............................................................................................................................99
Canceling a print job.......................................................................................................................................100
Copying.......................................................................................................101
Making copies....................................................................................................................................................101
Copying photos................................................................................................................................................102
Copying on specialty media......................................................................................................................... 102
Creating a copy shortcut using the printer control panel..................................................................... 103
Customizing copy settings............................................................................................................................ 104
Placing information on copies......................................................................................................................109
Canceling a copy job....................................................................................................................................... 110
Understanding the copy options..................................................................................................................110
E-mailing..................................................................................................... 113
Setting up the printer to e-mail......................................................................................................................113
Creating an e-mail shortcut............................................................................................................................114
Contents 3
E-mailing a document......................................................................................................................................115
Customizing e-mail settings...........................................................................................................................116
Canceling an e-mail..........................................................................................................................................117
Understanding the e-mail options................................................................................................................ 117
Faxing......................................................................................................... 120
Setting up the printer to fax.......................................................................................................................... 120
Sending a fax.................................................................................................................................................... 134
Creating shortcuts............................................................................................................................................137
Customizing fax settings................................................................................................................................ 137
Canceling an outgoing fax............................................................................................................................ 139
Holding and forwarding faxes...................................................................................................................... 139
Understanding the fax options.....................................................................................................................140
Scanning.....................................................................................................143
Using Scan to Network...................................................................................................................................143
Scanning to an FTP address......................................................................................................................... 143
Scanning to a computer or flash drive....................................................................................................... 146
Understanding the scan options..................................................................................................................148
Understanding the printer menus...........................................................151
Menus list............................................................................................................................................................151
Paper menu....................................................................................................................................................... 152
Reports menu....................................................................................................................................................165
Network/Ports menu....................................................................................................................................... 166
Security menu................................................................................................................................................... 179
Settings menu...................................................................................................................................................186
Help menu.........................................................................................................................................................237
Saving money and the environment......................................................238
Saving paper and toner.................................................................................................................................238
Saving energy..................................................................................................................................................239
Recycling............................................................................................................................................................241
Securing the printer................................................................................. 243
Statement of Volatility....................................................................................................................................243
Erasing volatile memory................................................................................................................................243
Erasing non‑volatile memory....................................................................................................................... 244
Contents 4
Erasing printer hard disk memory.............................................................................................................. 244
Configuring printer hard disk encryption................................................................................................. 245
Finding the printer security information....................................................................................................246
Maintaining the printer............................................................................ 247
Cleaning printer parts.................................................................................................................................... 247
Checking the status of parts and supplies...............................................................................................250
Estimated number of remaining pages......................................................................................................251
Ordering supplies............................................................................................................................................ 251
Storing supplies...............................................................................................................................................254
Replacing supplies......................................................................................................................................... 255
Moving the printer.......................................................................................................................................... 263
Managing the printer............................................................................... 265
Finding advanced networking and administrator information............................................................265
Checking the virtual display.........................................................................................................................265
Setting up e‑mail alerts................................................................................................................................. 265
Viewing reports...............................................................................................................................................266
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server...................................................266
Restoring factory default settings...............................................................................................................267
Clearing jams............................................................................................ 268
Avoiding jams.................................................................................................................................................. 268
Identifying jam locations................................................................................................................................ 271
Paper jam in the front cover.........................................................................................................................273
Paper jam in the rear door............................................................................................................................276
Paper jam in the standard bin..................................................................................................................... 280
Paper jam in the duplex unit......................................................................................................................... 281
Paper jam in trays........................................................................................................................................... 282
Paper jam in the multipurpose feeder.......................................................................................................283
Paper jam in the mailbox...............................................................................................................................284
Paper jam in the automatic document feeder.........................................................................................286
Paper jam in the staple finisher...................................................................................................................288
Staple jam in the finisher.............................................................................................................................. 289
Troubleshooting....................................................................................... 292
Understanding the printer messages........................................................................................................292
Contents 5
Solving printer problems................................................................................................................................312
Solving print problems.................................................................................................................................. 320
Solving copy problems.................................................................................................................................. 347
Solving fax problems..................................................................................................................................... 350
Solving scanner problems............................................................................................................................355
Solving home screen application problems............................................................................................360
Embedded Web Server does not open....................................................................................................360
Contacting customer support......................................................................................................................362
Notices....................................................................................................... 363
Product information........................................................................................................................................363
Edition notice................................................................................................................................................... 363
Power consumption....................................................................................................................................... 368
Index...........................................................................................................378
Contents 6
Safety information
Conventions
Note: A note identifies information that could help you.
Warning: A warning identifies something that could damage the product hardware or software.
CAUTION: A caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could injure you.
Dierent types of caution statements include:
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Indicates a risk of injury.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Indicates a risk of electrical shock.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: Indicates a risk of burn if touched.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Indicates a crush hazard.
CAUTION—PINCH HAZARD: Indicates a risk of being caught between moving parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to
an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use this product with extension cords, multioutlet power strips,
multioutlet extenders, or UPS devices. The power capacity of these types of accessories can be easily
overloaded by a laser printer and may result in a risk of fire, property damage, or poor printer
performance.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not place or use this product near
water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or
performance of procedures other than those specified in the User’s Guide may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release
emissions. You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for
selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced.
There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble,
or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions
and local regulations.
This equipment is not suitable for use in locations where children are likely to be present.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
Safety information 7
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal
injury or printer damage:
• Turn the printer
o
using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
• If an optional tray is installed, then remove it from the printer. To remove the optional tray, slide the latch on
the right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place.
• Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
• Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
• Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, use only the power cord
provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Use only the telecommunications (RJ‑11) cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement
when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer
o,
and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, make sure that all external
connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system connections) are properly installed in their marked
plug-in ports.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer
is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power
cord. Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects
such as furniture and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect
the power cord regularly for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet
before inspecting it.
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the
printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional
furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Safety information 8
Learning about the printer
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for? Find it here
Initial setup instructions:
• Connecting the printer
• Installing the printer software
Setup documentation—The setup documentation
came with the printer and is also available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:
• Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
• Loading paper
• Configuring printer settings
• Viewing and printing documents and photos
• Setting up and using the printer software
• Configuring the printer on a network
• Caring for and maintaining the printer
• Troubleshooting and solving problems
User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The
guides are available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Note: These guides are also available in other
languages.
Information on setting up and configuring the accessibility
features of your printer
Lexmark Accessibility Guide—This guide is available
at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software
program or application, and then click Help.
Click
?
to view context‑sensitive information.
Notes:
• Help is automatically installed with the printer
software.
• The printer software is located in the printer
program folder or on the desktop, depending
on your operating system.
Learning about the printer 9
What are you looking for? Find it here
The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer
support:
• Documentation
• Driver downloads
• Live chat support
• E‑mail support
• Voice support
Lexmark support Web site—
http://support.lexmark.com
Note: Select your country or region, and then select
your product to view the appropriate support site.
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation
for your country or region can be found on the
support Web site or on the printed warranty that came
with your printer.
Record the following information (located on the
store receipt and at the back of the printer), and have
it ready when you contact customer support so that
they may serve you faster:
• Machine Type number
• Serial number
• Date purchased
• Store where purchased
Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region:
• In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited
Warranty included with this printer, or go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
• In other countries and regions—See the printed
warranty that came with this printer.
Selecting a location for the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to
install any options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
• Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical
Committee 156 standard.
• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
• Keep the printer:
– Clean, dry, and free of dust.
– Away from stray staples and paper clips.
– Away from the direct
airflow
of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
– Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.
• Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:
Ambient temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Storage temperature 1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)
• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:
Learning about the printer 10
1 Right side 152 mm (6 in.)
2 Front 394 mm (15.5 in.)
3 Left side 152 mm (6 in.)
4 Rear 152 mm (6 in.)
5 Top 152 mm (6 i n.)
Learning about the printer 11
Printer configurations
Basic model
2
3
5
1
6
7
8
4
10
9
1 Automatic document feeder (ADF)
2 ADF tray
3 ADF bin
4 4‑bin mailbox
5 Standard bin
6 Multipurpose feeder
7 Standard 550-sheet tray
8 2100-sheet tray
9 Caster base
10 Printer control panel
Learning about the printer 12
Configured model
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted
configurations
require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional
furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
4
5
1
2
3
Hardware option Alternative hardware option
1 Staple finisher
• 4‑bin mailbox
•
Oset
stacker
• Staple, hole punch finisher
2 550‑sheet trays 2100‑sheet tray
3 Caster base None
4 2100‑sheet tray 550‑sheet trays
5 4‑bin mailbox
• Staple finisher
• Staple, hole punch
finisher
• Oset stacker
When using optional trays:
• Always use a caster base when the printer is
configured
with a 2100‑sheet tray.
• The 2100‑sheet tray must always be at the bottom of a configuration.
• You cannot use an optional 550‑sheet tray if the 2100‑sheet tray is installed.
• A maximum of three optional trays may be configured with the printer.
• The printer supports only one
finisher
at a time.
Understanding the basic functions of the scanner
• Make quick copies or set the printer to perform
specific
copy jobs.
• Send a fax using the printer control panel.
Learning about the printer 13
• Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
• Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, a flash drive, or an FTP destination.
• Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF through an FTP).
Using the ADF and scanner glass
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
ABC
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided (duplex) pages.
Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, book
pages, small items (such as postcards or photos),
transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents.
Using the ADF
When using the ADF:
• Load the document into the ADF tray faceup, short edge
first.
• Load up to 150 sheets of plain paper into the ADF tray.
• Scan sizes from 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) wide to 216 x 635 mm (8.5 x 25 inches) long
• Scan media weighs from 52 to 120 g/m
2
(14–32 lb).
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Using the scanner glass
When using the scanner glass:
• Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner with the green arrow.
• Scan or copy documents up to 216 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
• Copy books up to 25.3 mm (1 inch) thick.
Learning about the printer 14
Understanding the printer control panel
Using the printer control panel
1
@ ! .
2
A B C
3
D E F
4
G H I
5
J K L
6
M N O
7
P Q R S
8
T U V
9
W X Y Z
*
0
#
C
1
2
3
8
7
6
4
5
Use the To
1 Display
• View the printer status and messages.
• Set up and operate the printer.
2 Home button Go to the home screen.
3 Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep mode:
• Touch the screen or press any hard button.
• Open a door or cover.
• Send a print job from the computer.
• Perform a power‑on reset (POR) with the main power switch.
• Attach a device to the USB port on the printer.
4 Keypad Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
5 Start button Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.
6 Clear all / Reset button Reset the default settings of a function, such as copying, faxing, or scanning.
7 Stop or Cancel button Stop all printer activity.
8 Indicator light Check the status of the printer.
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and
indicator lights
The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status
or condition.
Indicator light Printer status
O The printer is o or in Hibernate mode.
Blinking green The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
Solid green The printer is on, but idle.
Understanding the printer control panel 15
Indicator light Printer status
Blinking red The printer requires user intervention.
Sleep button light Printer status
O The printer is o, idle or in Ready state.
Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode.
Blinking amber The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode.
Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes
completely o for 1.9 seconds in a slow,
pulsing pattern
The printer is in Hibernate mode.
Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the
home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu
screen; or to respond to messages.
Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative
setup, and active embedded solutions.
6
1
12
11
10
7
8
2 3 4 5
9
13
14
Touch To
1 Change Language Launch the Change Language pop‑up window that lets you change the primary
language of the printer.
2 Copy Access the Copy menus and make copies.
3 Fax Access the Fax menus and send fax.
4 E-mail Access the E-mail menus and send e‑mails.
5 FTP Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP
server.
6 Arrows Scroll up or down.
7 Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms.
8 Menu icon Access the printer menus.
Note: The menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state.
Understanding the printer control panel 16
Touch To
9 Bookmarks Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and
file links.
Note: The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function, and not
from any other application.
10 USB Drive View, select, print, scan, or e‑mail photos and documents from a flash drive.
Note: This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory
card or flash drive is connected to the printer.
11 Held Jobs Display all current held jobs.
12 Status/Supplies
• Show a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to
continue processing.
• Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to
clear it.
13 Tips Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.
14 Search Held Jobs Search for one or more of the following items:
• User name for held or confidential print jobs
• Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs
•
Profile
names
• Bookmark container or print job names
• USB container or print job names for supported file types
Features
Feature Description
Menu trail line
Example:
Menus > Settings > Copy Settings >
Number of Copies
A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature shows
the path taken to arrive at the current menu.
Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu.
Number of Copies is not underlined because it is the current screen. If you
touch an underlined word on the “Number of Copies” screen before the
number of copies is set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does
not become the default setting.
Attendance message alert
If an attendance message aects a function, then this icon appears and the
red indicator light blinks.
Warning
If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.
Status message bar
• Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
• Show printer conditions such as Toner Low or Cartridge Low.
• Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing.
Understanding the printer control panel 17
Feature Description
Printer IP address
Example:
123.123.123.123
The IP address of your network printer is located at the upper left corner of
the home screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods.
You can use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so
you can view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not
physically near the printer.
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary, depending on your home screen customization
settings, administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
7
6
3
4
1
5
2
Touch To
1 Arrows View a list of options.
2 Copy It Print a copy.
3 Advanced Options Select a copy option.
4 Home Go to the home screen.
5 Increase Select a higher value.
6 Decrease Select a lower value.
7 Tips Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.
Other touch-screen buttons
Touch To
Accept
Save a setting.
Understanding the printer control panel 18
Touch To
Cancel
• Cancel an action or a selection.
• Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes.
Reset
Reset values on the screen.
Understanding the printer control panel 19
Setting up and using the home screen
applications
Notes:
• Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative
setup, and active embedded applications.
• There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. For more information, go to
www.lexmark.com or contact the place where you purchased the printer.
Finding the IP address of the printer
Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
You can find the printer IP address:
• From the top left corner of the printer home screen.
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then
finding
the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Finding the IP address of the computer
For Windows users
1 In the Run dialog box, type cmd to open the command prompt.
2 Type ipconfig, and then look for the IP address.
For Macintosh users
1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, select Network.
2 Select your connection type, and then click Advanced > TCP/IP.
3 Look for the IP address.
Accessing the Embedded Web Server
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings
even when you are not physically near the printer.
1 Obtain the printer IP address:
• From the printer control panel home screen
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 20
2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
3 Press Enter.
Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
Customizing the home screen
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Do one or more of the following:
• Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions.
a Click Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
b Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the home screen.
Note: If you clear a check box beside an icon, then the icon does not appear on the home
screen.
c Click Submit.
• Customize the icon for an application. For more information, see “Finding information about the home
screen applications” on page 22 or see the documentation that came with the application.
Understanding the dierent applications
Use To
Card Copy Scan and print both sides of a card on a single page. For more information, see
“Setting up
Card Copy” on page 23.
Fax Scan a document, and then send it to a fax number. For more information, see
“Faxing” on
page 120.
Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen.
For more information, see
“Setting up Forms and Favorites” on page 22.
Multi Send Scan a document, and then send it to multiple destinations. For more information, see
“Setting up Multi Send” on page 24.
MyShortcut Create shortcuts directly on the printer home screen. For more information, see
“Using
MyShortcut” on page 23.
Scan to E‑mail Scan a document, and then send it to an e‑mail address. For more information, see
“E-mailing”
on page 113.
Scan to Computer Scan a document, and then save it to a predefined folder on a host computer. For more
information, see
“Setting up Scan to Computer” on page 147.
Scan to FTP Scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. For more information, see
“Scanning to an FTP address” on page 144.
Scan to Network Scan a document, and then send it to a network shared folder. For more information, see
“Setting up Scan to Network” on page 24.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 21
Activating the home screen applications
Finding information about the home screen applications
Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, you
must first activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information on
accessing the Embedded Web Server, see
“Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on page 20.
For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications, do the following:
1 Go to http://support.lexmark.com.
2 Click Software Solutions, and then select either of the following:
• Scan to Network—This lets you find information about the Scan to Network application.
• Other Applications—This lets you
find
information about the other applications.
3 Click the Manuals tab, and then select the document for the home screen application.
Setting up Forms and Favorites
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this
application. To check for updates of this User’s Guide, go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms
directly from the printer home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site
where the bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing,
security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the
documentation that came with your operating system.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Forms and Favorites.
3 Click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
• See the mouse-over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
• To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct, type the correct IP address of the
host computer where the bookmark is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of
the host computer, see
“Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 20.
• Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 22
Setting up Card Copy
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this
application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Quickly and easily copy insurance, identification, and other wallet‑size cards.
You can scan and print both sides of a card on a single page, saving paper and showing the
information on the card in a more convenient manner.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Card Copy.
3 Change the default scanning options, if necessary.
• Default tray—Select the default tray to be used for printing scan images.
• Default number of copies—Specify the number of copies that should automatically print when the
application is used.
• Default contrast setting—Specify a setting to increase or decrease the level of contrast when a copy
of the scanned card is printed. Select Best for Content if you want the printer to adjust the contrast
automatically.
• Default scale setting—Set the size of the scanned card when printed. The default setting is 100% (full
size).
• Resolution setting—Adjust the quality of the scanned card.
Notes:
– When scanning a card, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 200 dpi for color, and 400
dpi for black and white.
– When scanning multiple cards, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 150 dpi for color,
and 300 dpi for black and white.
• Print Borders—Select the check box to print the scan image with a border around it.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Card Copy on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions.
Using MyShortcut
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this
application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 23
Use To
Create shortcuts on the printer home screen, with settings for up to 25 frequently used copy, fax,
or e-mail jobs.
To use the application, touch MyShortcut, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.
Setting up Multi Send
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this
application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Scan a document, and then send the scanned document to multiple destinations.
Note: Make sure there is enough space in the printer hard disk.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The printer IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Multi Send.
3 From the Profiles section, click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
• See the mouse‑over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
• If you select FTP or Share Folder as a destination, then make sure the location settings of the
destination are correct. Type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified
destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer, see
“Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 20.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Multi Send on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the
printer display.
Setting up Scan to Network
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this
application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 24
Use To
Scan a document and send it to a shared network folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder
destinations.
Notes:
• The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where
the destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer
at least a write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating
system.
• The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Do either of the following:
• Click Set up Scan to Network > Click here.
• Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Scan to Network.
3 Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
• See the mouse-over help beside some of the fields for a description of the setting.
• To make sure the location settings of the destination are correct, type the correct IP address of the
host computer where the specified destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP
address of the host computer, see
“Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 20.
• Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the specified destination is located.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on
the printer display.
Setting up Remote Operator Panel
This application enables you to interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically near
the network printer. From your computer, you can view the printer status, release held print jobs, create
bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Remote Operator Panel Settings.
3 Select the Enable check box, and then customize the settings.
4 Click Submit.
To use the application, click Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC Applet.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 25
Exporting and importing a configuration
You can export
configuration
settings into a text
file,
and then import the
file
to apply the settings to other
printers.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 To export or import a configuration for one application, do the following:
a Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management.
b From the list of installed applications, click the name of the application you want to configure.
c Click Configure, and then do either of the following:
• To export a configuration to a file, click Export, and then follow the instructions on the computer
screen to save the configuration file.
Notes:
– When saving the configuration file, you can type a unique file name or use the default name.
– If a "JVM Out of Memory” error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration
file
is saved.
• To import a
configuration
from a
file,
click Import, and then browse to the saved
configuration
file
that was exported from a previously configured printer.
Notes:
– Before importing the configuration file, you can choose to preview it first or load it directly.
– If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click
Apply.
3 To export or import a configuration for multiple applications, do the following:
a Click Settings > Import/Export.
b Do either of the following:
• To export a
configuration
file,
click Export Embedded Solutions Settings File, and then follow the
instructions on the computer screen to save the
configuration
file.
• To import a
configuration
file,
do the following:
1 Click Import Embedded Solutions Settings File > Choose File, and then browse to the saved
configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer.
2 Click Submit.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 26
Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Available internal options
• Memory card
– DDR3 DIMM
– Flash memory
• Fonts
• Firmware cards
– Forms barcode
– PRESCRIBE
– IPDS
– Printcryption
• Lexmark
TM
Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)
– Parallel 1284-B interface
– MarkNet
TM
N8350 802.11 b/g/n wireless printer server
– MarkNet N8130 10/100 fiber interface
– RS-232-C serial interface
Accessing the controller board
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
Additional printer setup 27
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1 Open the controller board access cover.
2 Using a screwdriver, loosen the screws on the controller board shield.
Additional printer setup 28
3 Remove the shield.
2
1
4 Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connector.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic
components or connectors.
1
2
3
1 Lexmark Internal Solutions Port or printer hard disk connector
2 Option card connector
3 Memory card connector
Additional printer setup 29
5 Reattach the shield, and then align the screws with the holes.
1
2
6 Tighten the screws on the shield.
Additional printer setup 30
7 Close the access cover.
Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch something metal on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic
components or connectors.
An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the controller board.
1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see
“Accessing the controller board” on page 27.
2 Unpack the memory card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so
may cause damage.
Additional printer setup 31
3 Align the notch (1) on the memory card with the ridge (2) on the connector.
1
2
4 Push the memory card straight into the connector, and then push the card toward the controller board wall
until it clicks into place.
5 Reattach the controller board shield, and then the controller board access cover.
Installing an optional card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Additional printer setup 32
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components
or connectors.
1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see
“Accessing the controller board” on page 27.
2 Unpack the optional card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the controller board.
2
1
4 Push the card firmly into place as shown in the illustration.
Additional printer setup 33
Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the
controller board.
Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the controller
board.
5 Close the controller board access door.
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, it may be necessary to manually
add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Adding available options in the print driver” on page 52.
Installing an Internal Solutions Port
The controller board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP).
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer
first
before touching any controller board electronic
components or connectors.
1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see
“Accessing the controller board” on page 27.
2 If a printer hard disk is installed, then remove the printer hard disk first.
For more information, see “Removing a printer hard disk” on page 44.
3 Unpack the ISP kit.
2
3
4
1
Additional printer setup 34
1 ISP solution
2 Screw for attaching the plastic bracket to the ISP
3 Screws for attaching the ISP mounting bracket to the controller board shield
4 Plastic bracket
4 Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening.
a Loosen the screw.
b Lift the metal cover, and then pull it out completely.
1 2 3
Additional printer setup 35
5 Align the posts of the plastic bracket to the holes on the controller board cage, and then press the plastic
bracket on the controller board cage until it clicks into place.
Note: Make sure that the plastic bracket has latched completely, and that the plastic bracket is seated
firmly
on the cage.
6 Install the ISP on the plastic bracket.
Note: Hold the ISP at an angle over the plastic bracket so that any overhanging connectors will pass
through the ISP opening in the cage.
Additional printer setup 36
7 Lower the ISP toward the plastic bracket until the ISP is seated between the guides of the plastic bracket.
8 Use the provided thumbscrew for the ISP to attach the plastic bracket to the ISP.
Note: Turn the screw clockwise, enough to hold the ISP in place, but do not tighten it yet.
Additional printer setup 37
9 Attach the two provided screws to secure the ISP mounting bracket to the controller board shield.
10 Tighten the thumbscrew that is attached to the ISP.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not screw it on too tightly.
Additional printer setup 38
11 Connect the ISP solution interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color-coded.
Installing a printer hard disk
Note: This task requires a
flat
‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components
or connectors.
1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see
“Accessing the controller board” on page 27.
2 Unpack the printer hard disk.
Additional printer setup 39
3 Locate the appropriate connector on the controller board cage.
Note: If an optional ISP is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP.
Additional printer setup 40
To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP:
a Remove the screws attached to the printer hard disk mounting bracket, and then remove the bracket.
b Align the standos of the printer hard disk to the holes in the ISP, and then press the printer hard disk
down until the standos are in place.
Installation warning: Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly. Do not touch or press
on the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage.
c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color‑coded.
Additional printer setup 41
To install a printer hard disk directly on the controller board cage:
a Align the
standos
of the printer hard disk to the holes in the controller board cage, and then press the
printer hard disk down until the standos are in place.
Installation warning: Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly. Do not touch or press
on the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage.
Additional printer setup 42
b Use the two provided screws to attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket.
c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color‑coded.
Additional printer setup 43
Removing a printer hard disk
Note: This task requires a
flat
‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer
o,
and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components
or connectors.
1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see
“Accessing the controller board” on page 27.
2 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the controller board, leaving the cable attached to the
printer hard disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage
the latch before pulling out the cable.
Additional printer setup 44
3 Remove the screws holding the printer hard disk in place.
4 Remove the printer hard disk.
5 Set aside the printer hard disk.
Additional printer setup 45
Installing hardware options
Order of installation
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional
furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Install the printer and any options you have purchased in the following order:
• Caster base
• Optional 2100‑sheet tray or 550‑sheet trays
• Printer
For more information on installing a caster base or finisher see the setup documentation that came with the
option.
Installing optional trays
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer
o,
and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional
furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
1 Turn o the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
Additional printer setup 46
2
1
2 Unpack the optional tray, and then remove all packing material.
3 Pull out the tray completely from the base.
4 Remove any packing material from inside the tray.
5 Insert the tray into the base.
6 Place the tray near the printer.
7 Align the optional tray with the caster base.
Note: Make sure to lock the wheels of the caster base to secure the printer.
Additional printer setup 47
8 Align the printer with the tray, and then slowly lower the printer into place.
Note: Optional trays lock together when stacked.
9 Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the
printer.
Additional printer setup 48
1
2
Note: When the printer software and any optional trays are installed, you may need to manually add the
options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Addin g
available options in the print driver” on page 52.
To uninstall the optional trays, slide the latch on the right side of the printer toward the front of the printer until
it clicks into place, and then remove stacked trays one at a time from the top to the bottom.
Attaching cables
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to
an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of
fire
or electrical shock, use only the power cord
provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid loss of data or printer malfunction, do not touch the USB cable, any
wireless network adapter, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing.
Additional printer setup 49
4
5
6
7
3
1
2
Use the To
1 EXT port Connect additional devices (telephone or answering machine) to the printer
and the telephone line. Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax line
for the printer and if this connection method is supported in your country or
region.
Note: Remove the plug to access the port.
2 LINE port Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall jack
(RJ‑11), DSL filter, or VoIP adapter, or any other adapter that allows you to
access the telephone line to send and receive faxes.
3 Power cord socket Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
4 USB printer port Connect the printer to a computer.
5 Ethernet port Connect the printer to an Ethernet network.
6 Internal solutions port (ISP) or
printer hard disk slot
Note: If the printer supports
wireless connection, then
attach the wireless antenna
here.
Attach an ISP or a printer hard disk.
7 USB port Attach any compatible option.
Additional printer setup 50
Organizing cables
Attach the Ethernet cable and power cord, and then neatly tuck the cables in the channels at the back of the printer.
Setting up the printer software
Installing the printer software
1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the software CD that came with your printer.
• Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then select your printer and operating system.
2 Run the installer, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
3 For Macintosh users, add the printer.
Note: Obtain the printer IP address from the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
Additional printer setup 51
Adding available options in the print driver
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder.
2 Select the printer you want to update, and then do the following:
• For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
• For earlier versions, select Properties.
3 Navigate to the Configuration tab, and then select Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.
4 Apply the changes.
For Macintosh users
1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer, and then select Options & Supplies.
2 Navigate to the list of hardware options, and then add any installed options.
3 Apply the changes.
Networking
Notes:
• Purchase a MarkNet N8350 wireless network adapter before setting up the printer on a wireless
network. For information on installing the wireless network adapter, see the setup sheet that came with
the adapter.
• A Service Set
Identifier
(SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP),
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA), and WPA2 are types of security used on a network.
Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network
To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you
begin:
Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing
the printer.
• A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network
• The network gateway
• The network mask
• A nickname for the printer (optional)
Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can
choose to use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.
You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer
can physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems
caused by a damaged cable.
Additional printer setup 52
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
Notes:
• Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
• Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:
• SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
• Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
• Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if
you are not sure which channel to select.
• Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:
– WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the
key currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.
– WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must
be set for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate
on the network.
– 802.1X–RADIUS
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:
• Authentication type
• Inner authentication type
• 802.1X user name and password
• Certificates
– No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network.
Notes:
– If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless
utility of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID
or the security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access
point, or contact your system support person.
– To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation
that came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or
consult your system support person.
Additional printer setup 53
Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard
Before you begin, make sure that:
• A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
• An Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer.
• Active NIC is set to Auto. To set this to Auto, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Active NIC > Auto > Submit
Note: Make sure to turn o the printer, then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup
2 Select a wireless connection setup.
Use To
Search for networks Show available wireless connections.
Note: This menu item shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs.
Enter a network name Manually type the SSID.
Note: Make sure to type the correct SSID.
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup.
3 Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
Before you begin, make sure that:
• The access point (wireless router) is Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS) certified or WPS‑compatible. For more
information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
• A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly. For more information,
see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
Using the Push Button Configuration method
1
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup >
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > Start Push Button Method
2 Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Using the Personal Identification Number (PIN) method
1
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup >
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > Start PIN Method
2 Copy the eight‑digit WPS PIN.
Additional printer setup 54
3 Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field.
Notes:
• The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
4 Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access
point.
5 Enter the eight‑digit PIN, and then save the setting.
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web
Server
Before you begin, make sure that:
• Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network.
• A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless.
3 Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point (wireless router).
Note: Make sure to enter the correct SSID, security method, preshared key or passphrase, network
mode, and channel.
4 Click Submit.
5 Turn
o
the printer, and then disconnect the Ethernet cable. Then wait for at least
five
seconds, and then
turn the printer back on.
6 To verify if your printer is connected to the network, print a network setup page. Then in the Network Card
[x] section, see if the status is Connected.
Additional printer setup 55
Changing port settings after installing an internal solutions port
Notes:
• If the printer has a static IP address, then do not change the configuration.
• If the computers are configured to use the network name instead of an IP address, then do not change
the configuration.
• If you are adding a wireless internal solutions port (ISP) to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet
connection, then disconnect the printer from the Ethernet network.
For Windows users
1
Open the printers folder.
2 From the shortcut menu of the printer with the new ISP, open the printer properties.
3 Configure the port from the list.
4 Update the IP address.
5 Apply the changes.
For Macintosh users
1
From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to the list of printers, and then select + > IP.
2 Type the IP address in the address field.
3 Apply the changes.
Setting up serial printing (Windows only)
1 Set the parameters in the printer.
a From the control panel, navigate to the menu for the port settings.
b Locate the menu for the serial port settings, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.
c Apply the changes.
2 From your computer, open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
3 Open the printer properties, and then select the COM port from the list.
4 Set the COM port parameters in Device Manager.
Notes:
• Serial printing reduces printing speed.
• Make sure that the serial cable is connected to the serial port on your printer.
Additional printer setup 56
Verifying printer setup
When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set
up correctly by printing the following:
• Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed
options appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed
correctly. Remove the option, and then install it again.
• Network setup page—If your printer has Ethernet or wireless capability and is attached to a network, then
print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information
that aids network printing configuration.
Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Menu Settings Page
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This
page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page
2 Check the
first
section of the network setup page, and
confirm
that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be
malfunctioning. Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Additional printer setup 57
Loading paper and specialty media
The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can
aect
how reliably documents print. For more
information, see
“Avoiding jams” on page 268 and “Storing paper” on page 88.
Setting the paper size and type
From the home screen navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type >
Configuring Universal paper settings
Universal paper size is a user‑
defined
setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer
menus.
Notes:
• The smallest supported Universal size is 70 x 127 mm (2.76 x 5 inches) for one‑sided printing and 105 x
148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches) for two‑sided (duplex) printing.
• The largest supported Universal size is 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) for one‑sided and two‑sided
printing.
• When printing on paper less than 210 mm (8.3 inches) wide, the printer may print at a reduced speed
after a period of time to ensure the best print performance.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select a unit of measure
2 To uc h Portrait Width or Portrait Height.
3 Select the width or height, and then touch Submit.
Loading the 550‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1 Pull out the tray.
Notes:
• When loading folio‑, legal‑, or
Oficio
‑size paper, lift the tray slightly, and then pull it out completely.
• Avoid removing trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a
jam.
Loading paper and specialty media 58
Loading paper and specialty media 59
2 Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks
into place.
Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
Loading paper and specialty media 60
Loading paper and specialty media 61
3 Unlock the length guide, and then squeeze and slide the guide to the correct position for the size of the
paper being loaded.
Notes:
• Lock the length guide for all paper sizes.
• Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
Loading paper and specialty media 62
4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.
5 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown.
Note: Make sure the paper or envelope is loaded properly.
• There are dierent ways for loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is
installed or not.
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
One‑sided printing
Loading paper and specialty media 63
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
ABC
Two‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
• If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher, then make sure the holes on the
long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
ABC
ABC
Note: If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray, then a jam may occur.
Loading paper and specialty media 64
• Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.
• If you are loading envelopes, then make sure that the flap side is facing up and the envelopes are on
the left side of the tray.
Loading paper and specialty media 65
• Make sure the paper is below the solid line, which is the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage:
Overfilling
the tray can cause paper jams.
Loading paper and specialty media 66
• When using card stock, labels, or other types of specialty media, make sure the paper is below the
dashed line, which is the alternate paper
fill
indicator.
6 For custom‑ or Universal‑size paper, adjust the paper guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack, and then
lock the length guide.
Loading paper and specialty media 67
7 Insert the tray.
8 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Loading the 2100‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1 Pull out the tray.
2 Adjust the width and length guides.
Loading paper and specialty media 68
Loading A5‑size paper
a Pull up and slide the width guide to the position for A5.
L
G
L
O
F
C
F
O
L
I
O
L
T
R
A
4
A
5
1
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A
4
A
5
2
L
G
L
O
F
C
F
O
L
I
O
LT
R
A
4
A
5
b Squeeze and slide the length guide to the position for A5 until it clicks into place.
2
1 2
Loading paper and specialty media 69
c Remove the A5 length guide from its holder.
1
2
d Insert the A5 length guide into its designated slot.
Note: Press the A5 length guide until it clicks into place.
Loading A4‑, letter‑, legal‑, oficio‑, and folio‑size paper
a Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.
L
G
L
O
F
C
F
O
L
I
O
LT
R
A
4
A
5
1
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
2
LGL
O
FC
FO
LIO
LTR
A4
A5
Loading paper and specialty media 70
b If the A5 length guide is still attached to the length guide, then remove it from its place. If the A5 length
guide is not attached, then proceed to step d.
c Put the A5 length guide in its holder.
2
1
Loading paper and specialty media 71
d Squeeze the length guide and slide it to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until
it clicks into place.
3 Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper.
Straighten the edges on a level surface.
4 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown.
Note: Make sure the paper is loaded properly.
• There are dierent ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is
installed or not.
Loading paper and specialty media 72
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
• If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher, then make sure the holes on the
long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
ABC
ABC
Note: If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray, then a jam may occur.
Loading paper and specialty media 73
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage:
Overfilling
the tray can cause paper jams.
5 Insert the tray.
Note: Press the paper stack down while inserting the tray.
Loading paper and specialty media 74
6 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Loading the multipurpose feeder
1 Pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
Note: Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing.
Loading paper and specialty media 75
2 Using the handle, pull the multipurpose feeder extender.
Loading paper and specialty media 76
Note: Guide the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open.
3 Slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.
Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of tray to help position the guides.
Loading paper and specialty media 77
4 Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading.
• Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper.
Straighten the edges on a level surface.
• Hold transparencies by the edges, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.
• Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on
a level surface.
5 Load the paper or specialty media.
Note: Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop.
• Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time.
• Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder, lies flat and is not bent or wrinkled.
• There are dierent ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is
installed or not.
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
One‑sided printing One‑sided printing
Loading paper and specialty media 78
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
ABC
Two‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
• If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple
finisher,
then make sure the holes on the
long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
ABC
Note: If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray, then a jam may occur.
Loading paper and specialty media 79
• Load envelopes with the flap side down and on the left of the multipurpose feeder.
B
5
E
X
EC
A
4
A
5
LTR
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated
linings, or self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
• Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Loading paper and specialty media 80
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the feeder can cause paper jams.
6 For custom- or universal-size paper, adjust the width guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack.
7 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in
the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Linking and unlinking trays
The printer links trays when the
specified
paper size and type are the same. When a linked tray becomes empty,
paper feeds from the next linked tray. To prevent trays from linking, assign a unique custom paper type name.
Linking and unlinking trays
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu.
3 Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.
• To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.
• To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.
4 Click Submit.
Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more
information, see
“Setting the paper size and type” on page 58.
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the
printer. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur
if settings are not properly configured.
Creating a custom name for a paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.
3 Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
Loading paper and specialty media 81
4 Click Submit.
5 Click Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Using the printer control panel
1
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Names
2 Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
3 Touc h Submit.
4 Touc h Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Assigning a custom paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Types
2 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑
defined
custom names.
3 Touc h Submit.
Loading paper and specialty media 82
Paper and specialty media guide
Notes:
• Make sure that the paper size, type, and weight are set correctly on the computer or on the control
panel.
• Flex, fan, and straighten specialty media before loading them.
• The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
• For more information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide on the Lexmark
support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Using specialty media
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content,
thickness, and texture, can significantly aect print quality.
• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
card stock loaded in the tray.
• Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Specify the paper texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
• Preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly aect the print quality and cause jams or other paper
feed problems.
• Before loading the card stock on the tray, flex and fan the card stock to loosen them. Straighten the edges
on a level surface.
Tips on using envelopes
• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
envelopes loaded in the tray.
• Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers.
• For best performance, use envelopes made from 90‑g/m
2
(24‑lb) paper or 25% cotton.
• Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
• To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
– Have excessive curl or twist.
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way.
– Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing.
– Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars.
– Have an interlocking design.
– Have postage stamps attached.
– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position.
Paper and specialty media guide 83
– Have bent corners.
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes.
• Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
• Before loading the envelopes on the tray, flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and
then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal
envelopes.
Tips on using labels
• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
labels loaded in the tray.
• Print samples on labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• For more information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide at
http://support.lexmark.com.
• Use labels designed specifically for laser printers.
• Do not use labels with slick backing material.
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel o during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial
sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and toner
cartridge warranties.
• Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
• Before loading labels on the tray, flex and fan labels to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Tips on using letterhead
• Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.
• Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Before loading letterhead, flex and fan the sheets to prevent them from sticking together.
• Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead.
Source Printing Printable side Paper orientation
Trays One‑sided Facedown Load the sheet with the
top edge toward the
front of the tray.
Trays Two‑sided Faceup Load the sheet with the
bottom edge entering
the printer first.
Multipurpose feeder One‑sided Faceup Load the sheet with the
top edge entering the
printer
first.
Multipurpose feeder Two‑sided Facedown Load the sheet with the
bottom edge entering
the printer first.
Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the preprinted letterhead is acceptable
for laser printers.
Paper and specialty media guide 84
Tips on using transparencies
• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
transparencies loaded in the tray.
• Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Use transparencies designed
specifically
for laser printers.
• Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems.
• Before loading transparencies, flex and fan the sheets to prevent them from sticking together.
• When printing on large volumes of transparencies, make sure to print by batches of only up to 20 with an
interval of at least three minutes between batches, to prevent the transparencies from sticking together in
the bin. You can also remove transparencies from the bin by batches of 20.
Paper guidelines
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics aect print quality and reliability. Consider these factors before printing on
them:
Weight
The printer trays and multipurpose feeder can automatically feed paper weights between 60–176 g/m
2
(16–
47‑lb) grain long paper. The 2100‑sheet tray can automatically feed paper weights up to 60–135 g/m
2
(16–36‑lb)
grain long paper. Paper lighter than 60 g/m
2
(16 lb) might not be
sti
enough to feed properly, and may cause
jams.
Note: Two‑sided printing is supported for 60–176 g/m
2
(16–47‑lb) paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can
occur after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper
unwrapped in hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to
printing and can cause feeding problems.
Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly aects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper
is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300
Sheeld points; smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheeld points produces the best print quality.
Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper aects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes
that can degrade its performance.
Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing.
Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very dierent from the printer
environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Paper and specialty media guide 85
Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper
fibers
in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length
of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60–176 g/m
2
(16–47‑lb) paper, grain long paper is recommended.
Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides
the paper with a high degree of stability, resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality.
Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively aect paper handling.
Selecting paper
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:
• Always use new, undamaged paper.
• Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually
indicated on the paper package.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
• Use grain long for 60–90‑g/m
2
(16–24‑lb) paper.
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an oset lithographic or engraved printing process.
• Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
• Use inks that are not aected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet
these requirements; latex inks might not.
• Print samples on preprinted forms and letterheads considered for use before buying large quantities. This
determines whether or not the ink in the preprinted form or letterhead will aect print quality.
• When in doubt, contact your paper supplier.
Using recycled paper and other
oce
papers
As an environmentally conscientious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced
specifically for use in laser (electrophotographic) printers.
While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well, Lexmark consistently tests papers
that represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market. This
scientific
testing is conducted
with rigor and discipline. Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole, including
the following:
• Amount of post-consumer waste (Lexmark tests up to 100% post-consumer waste content.)
• Temperature and humidity conditions (Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world.)
• Moisture content (Business papers should have low moisture: 4–5%.)
• Bending resistance and proper stiness means optimum feeding through the printer.
Paper and specialty media guide 86
• Thickness (impacts how much can be loaded into a tray)
• Surface roughness (measured in Sheeld units, impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper)
• Surface friction (determines how easily sheets can be separated)
• Grain and formation (impacts curling, which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it
moves through the printer)
• Brightness and texture (look and feel)
Recycled papers are better than ever; however, the amount of recycled content in a paper
aects
the degree
of control over foreign matter. And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally
responsible manner, they are not perfect. The energy required to de-ink and deal with additives such as
colorants and “glue” often generates more carbon emissions than does normal paper production. However,
using recycled papers enables better resource management overall.
Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its
products. To gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment, the company
commissioned a number of life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor
(up to 80%) of carbon emissions caused throughout the entire life of a device (from design to end-of-life). This
is due to the energy-intensive manufacturing processes required to make paper.
Thus, Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper. Using recycled
paper is one way. Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another. Lexmark is well-
equipped to help customers minimize printing and copying waste. In addition, the company encourages
purchasing paper from suppliers who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices.
Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers, although a converter’s product list for special applications is
maintained. However, the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of
printing:
1 Minimize paper consumption.
2 Be selective about the origin of wood fiber. Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry
Stewardship Council (FSC) or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC). These
certifications guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ
environmentally and socially responsible forest management and restoration practices.
3 Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs: normal 75 or 80 g/m
2
certified paper, lower weight
paper, or recycled paper.
Unacceptable paper examples
Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers:
• Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers
• Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
• Preprinted papers that can be aected by the temperature in the printer fuser
• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise location on the page) greater than ± 2.3 mm (± 0.9
in.), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a
software application to successfully print on these forms.)
• Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
• Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
• Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European testing)
• Paper weighing less than 60 g/m
2
(16 lb)
• Multiple part forms or documents
Paper and specialty media guide 87
For more information about Lexmark, visit www.lexmark.com. General sustainability-related information can
be found at the Environmental Sustainability link.
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent.
Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative
humidity between 40 and 60 percent.
• Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
• Store individual packages on a
flat
surface.
• Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
• Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and
wrapper help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the sizes, types, and
weights of paper they support.
Note: For an unlisted paper size, select the closest larger listed size.
Paper sizes supported by the printer
Note: When printing on paper less than 210 mm (8.3 inches) wide, the printer may print at a reduced speed
after a period of time to ensure the best print performance.
Paper size
1
Dimensions 550‑sheet
tray
2100‑sheet
tray
Multipurpose
feeder
Duplex ADF Scanner
glass
A4 210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)
A5 148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 in.)
2
A6 105 x 148 mm (4.1
x 5.8 in.)
X
JIS B5 182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)
X
1
If your preferred default paper size cannot be set in the printer control panel, then you may select common paper
sizes that correspond to the position of the length guide in the tray from the Paper Size/Type menu. If the paper
size is not available, then select Universal or turn
o
tray size sensing. For more information, contact customer
support.
2
Paper is supported in long‑edge orientation.
3
Universal is supported in ADF only if the width is from 76 mm (3 in.) to 216 mm (8.5 in.), and the length is from 127
mm (5 in.) to 356 mm (14 in.).
Paper and specialty media guide 88
Paper size
1
Dimensions 550‑sheet
tray
2100‑sheet
tray
Multipurpose
feeder
Duplex ADF Scanner
glass
Letter 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
Legal 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
Executive 184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)
X
Oficio (México) 216 x 340 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
Folio 216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
Statement 140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
X
Universal 105 x 148 mm to
216 x 356 mm
(4.13 x 5.83 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)
X
70 x 127 mm to
216 x 356 mm
(2.76 x 5 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)
XX
X
3
7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)
98 x 191 mm (3.9
x 7.5 in.)
X XX
9 Envelope 98 x 225 mm
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)
X XX
10 Envelope 105 x 241 mm (4.1
x 9.5 in.)
X XX
DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)
X XX
C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm
(6.38 x 9.01 in.)
X XX
B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm
(6.93 x 9.84 in.)
X XX
Other Envelope 98 x 162 mm (3.9
x 6.4 in.) to 176 x
250 mm (6.9 x
9.8 in.)
X XX
1
If your preferred default paper size cannot be set in the printer control panel, then you may select common paper
sizes that correspond to the position of the length guide in the tray from the Paper Size/Type menu. If the paper
size is not available, then select Universal or turn
o
tray size sensing. For more information, contact customer
support.
2
Paper is supported in long‑edge orientation.
3
Universal is supported in ADF only if the width is from 76 mm (3 in.) to 216 mm (8.5 in.), and the length is from 127
mm (5 in.) to 356 mm (14 in.).
Paper and specialty media guide 89
Paper types and weights supported by the printer
The printer engine supports 60–176‑g/m
2
(16–47‑lb) paper weights.
Note: Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.
Paper type 550‑sheet
tray
2100‑sheet
tray
Multipurpose
feeder
Duplex ADF Scanner
glass
Paper
Card Stock X X
Plain Envelope X XX
Rough Envelope X XX
Paper Labels X X
Pharmacy Labels X
Transparencies* X X
* Print transparencies in batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together. For more information, see
“Tips on using transparencies” on page 85.
Paper sizes, types, and weights supported by the output options
Supported paper sizes
Paper size 4‑bin mailbox Oset stacker Staple finisher Staple, hole punch
finisher
A6
XXX
A5
1 1,3
JIS B5
2 2
Executive
2 2
Letter
A4
Legal
3
Folio
1
The finisher staples the paper if it is loaded long edge first.
2
The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it.
3
The finisher stacks and staples the paper but does not punch holes in it.
4
The finisher staples the paper if its width is from 210 mm (8.27 in.) to 217 mm (8.54 in.) and its length is from 210
mm (8.27 in.) to 356 mm (14 in.).
Paper and specialty media guide 90
Paper size 4‑bin mailbox Oset stacker Staple finisher Staple, hole punch
finisher
Oficio
Statement
2 2
Universal
4 3,4
1
The finisher staples the paper if it is loaded long edge first.
2
The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it.
3
The finisher stacks and staples the paper but does not punch holes in it.
4
The finisher staples the paper if its width is from 210 mm (8.27 in.) to 217 mm (8.54 in.) and its length is from 210
mm (8.27 in.) to 356 mm (14 in.).
Supported paper types and weights
Paper type Paper weight 4‑bin mailbox Oset stacker Staple finisher Staple, hole
punch finisher
Plain paper
90–176 g/m
2
(24–47 lb bond)
XX X X
60–90 g/m
2
(16–24 lb bond)
Card stock
163 g/m
2
(90 Ib index)
X
1 1
199 g/m
2
(110 Ib index)
XX X X
Transparency
2
146 g/m
2
(39 Ib bond)
X
1 1
Recycled
90–176 g/m
2
(24–47 lb bond)
XX X X
60–90 g/m
2
(16–24 lb bond)
3
Paper labels
180 g/m
2
(48 Ib bond)
X
XX
Dual web and
Integrated
180 g/m
2
(48 Ib bond)
X
XX
1
The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it.
2
Print transparencies in batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together. For more information, see
“Tips on using transparencies” on page 85.
3
Set the paper type to Paper or Rough/Cotton.
Paper and specialty media guide 91
Paper type Paper weight 4‑bin mailbox Oset stacker Staple finisher Staple, hole
punch finisher
Bond
90–176 g/m
2
(24–47 lb bond)
XX X X
60–90 g/m
2
(16–24 lb bond)
Envelope
105 g/m
2
(28 Ib bond)
XX X X
Rough Envelope
105 g/m
2
(28 Ib bond)
XX X X
Letterhead
90–176 g/m
2
(24–47 lb bond)
XX X X
60–90 g/m
2
(16–24 lb bond)
Preprinted
90–176 g/m
2
(24–47 lb bond)
XX X X
60–90 g/m
2
(16–24 lb bond)
Colored paper
90–176 g/m
2
(24–47 lb bond)
XX X X
60–90 g/m
2
(16–24 lb bond)
Light paper
90–176 g/m
2
(24–47 lb bond)
XX X X
60–90 g/m
2
(16–24 lb bond)
Heavy paper
90–176 g/m
2
(24–47 lb bond)
XX X X
60–90 g/m
2
(16–24 lb bond)
Rough/cotton
90–176 g/m
2
(24–47 lb bond)
XX X X
60–90 g/m
2
(16–24 lb bond)
1
The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it.
2
Print transparencies in batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together. For more information, see
“Tips on using transparencies” on page 85.
3
Set the paper type to Paper or Rough/Cotton.
Paper and specialty media guide 92
Paper type Paper weight 4‑bin mailbox Oset stacker Staple finisher Staple, hole
punch finisher
Custom type [x]
90–176 g/m
2
(24–47 lb bond)
XX X X
60–90 g/m
2
(16–24 lb bond)
3
1
The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it.
2
Print transparencies in batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together. For more information, see
“Tips on using transparencies” on page 85.
3
Set the paper type to Paper or Rough/Cotton.
Paper and specialty media guide 93
Printing
Printing a document
Printing forms
Use Forms and Favorites to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that is regularly
printed. Before you can use this application, first set it up on the printer. For more information, see
“Setting up
Forms and Favorites” on page 22.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
Forms and Favorites > select the form from the list > enter the number of copies > adjust other settings
2 Apply the changes.
Printing from a computer
Note: For labels, card stock, and envelopes, set the paper size and type in the printer before sending the
print job.
1 From the document that you are trying to print, open the Print dialog.
2 If necessary, adjust the settings.
3 Send the print job.
Adjusting toner darkness
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3 Adjust the toner darkness, and then click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness
2 Adjust the setting, and then touch Submit.
Printing 94
Printing from a mobile device
Note: Make sure that the printer and mobile device share the same wireless network. For information on
configuring
the wireless settings of your mobile device, see the documentation that came with the device.
Printing from a mobile device using Mopria Print Service
Mopria® Print Service is a mobile printing solution for mobile devices running on Android version 4.4 or later. It
allows you to print directly to any Mopria‑certified printer.
Note: Before printing, make sure that the Mopria Print Service is enabled.
1 From the home screen of your mobile device, launch a compatible application.
2 Tap Print, and then select the printer.
3 Send the print job.
Printing from a mobile device using Google Cloud Print
Google Cloud Print
TM
is a mobile printing service that allows enabled applications on mobile devices to print
to any Google Cloud Print‑ready printer.
1 From the home screen of your mobile device, launch an enabled application.
2 Tap Print, and then select the printer.
3 Send the print job.
Printing from a mobile device using AirPrint
AirPrint is a mobile printing solution that allows you to print directly from Apple devices to an AirPrint‑certified
printer.
Note: This application is supported only in some Apple devices.
1 From the home screen of your mobile device, launch a compatible application.
2 Select an item to print, and then tap the share icon.
3 Tap Print, and then select the printer.
4 Send the print job.
Printing from a mobile device using Lexmark Mobile Print
Lexmark Mobile Print allows you to send documents and images directly to a supported Lexmark printer.
1 Open the document, and then send or share the document to Lexmark Mobile Print.
Note: Some third‑party applications may not support the send or share feature. For more information, see
the documentation that came with the application.
2 Select a printer.
3 Print the document.
Printing 95
Printing from a flash drive
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:
• Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer
control panel.
• You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1 Insert a
flash
drive into the USB port.
1
@ ! .
2
A B C
3
D E F
4
G H I
5
J K L
6
M N O
7
P Q R S
8
T U V
9
W X Y Z
*
0
#
C
Notes:
• A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted.
• If you insert the
flash
drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred,
then the printer ignores the flash drive.
• If you insert the
flash
drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears on the
printer display. After these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print
documents from the
flash
drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, any connector,
the memory device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the
memory device. Loss of data can occur.
Printing 96
1
@ ! .
2
A B C
3
D E F
4
G H I
5
J K L
6
M N O
7
P Q R S
8
T U V
9
W X Y Z
*
0
#
C
2 From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.
3 Touch the arrows to get a preview of the document.
4 Use or to specify the number of copies to be printed, and then touch Print.
Notes:
• Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
• If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then touch Held
Jobs on the home screen to print files from the flash drive.
Supported flash drives and file types
Notes:
• High‑speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Low-speed USB devices are not
supported.
• USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New
Technology File System (NTFS) or any other
file
system are not supported.
Printing 97
Recommended flash drives File type
• Lexar JumpDrive FireFly (512MB and 1GB)
• SanDisk Cruzer Micro (512MB and 1GB)
• Sony Micro Vault Classic (512MB and 1GB)
Documents:
• .pdf
• .xps
Images:
• .dcx
• .gif
• .jpeg or .jpg
• .bmp
• .pcx
• .ti or .tif
• .png
•
.fls
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Security > Confidential Print > select the print job type
Use To
Max Invalid PIN Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and
PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer
control panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 1–9.
Repeat Job Expiration Print and store print jobs in the printer memory.
Verify Job Expiration Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies. It allows you
to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is automatically
deleted from the printer memory when all copies are printed.
Reserve Job Expiration Store print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Notes:
• Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
• You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the
printer control panel.
• All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
Printing 98
2 To uc h Submit.
Printing held jobs
1 From the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog.
2 Select the printer, and then do the following:
• For Windows users, click Properties or Preferences, and then click Print and Hold.
• For Macintosh users, select Print and Hold.
3 Select the print job type.
4 If necessary, assign a user name.
5 Send the print job.
6 From the printer home screen, touch Held Jobs.
7 Send the print job.
Modifying
confidential
print settings
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Security > Confidential Print Setup.
3 Modify the settings:
• Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds that number, all of the jobs for that
user are deleted.
• Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within that time,
all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
4 Click Submit to save the modified settings.
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2 To uc h PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
Printing 99
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Directory
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1 From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2 Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press
on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.
Canceling a print job from the computer
1 Depending on the operating system, do either of the following:
• Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
• From the System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer.
2 Select the print job to cancel.
Printing 100
Copying
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
ABC
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards
or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings).
Making copies
Making a quick copy
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure the size of the original document and the size of the copy
paper are the same.
3 From the printer control panel, press .
Copying using the ADF
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 Adjust the paper guides.
Copying 101
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It
Copying using the scanner glass
1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It
If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan
the next page.
3 Touc h Finish the Job.
Copying photos
1 Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content > Photo >
3 From the Content Source menu, select the appropriate setting that best matches the original photo.
4 Touc h > Copy It
Note: If you have more photos to copy, then place the next photo on the scanner glass, and then touch
Scan the next page.
5 Touc h Finish the Job.
Copying on specialty media
Copying on transparencies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
Copying 102
3 Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray that contains transparencies > Copy It
If there are no trays that contain transparencies, then navigate to:
Manual Feeder >
> select the size of the transparencies > > Transparency >
4 Load transparencies into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.
Copying on letterhead
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4 Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray containing the letterhead > Copy It
5 If there are no trays that support letterhead, then navigate to:
Manual Feeder > select the size of the letterhead > Letterhead
6 Load the letterhead faceup, top edge first into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.
Creating a copy shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, touch Copy.
2 Adjust the copy settings, and then touch Save as Shortcut.
Note: If you change the settings after the copy shortcut has been created, then the settings are not
saved.
3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4 Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Notes:
• The shortcut name appears in the Copy Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
• You can use the shortcut when copying another document using the same settings.
Copying 103
Customizing copy settings
Copying to a dierent size
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4 Navigate to:
Copy to > select a new size for the copy >
> Copy It
Making copies using paper from a selected tray
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4 Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray containing the paper type you want to use >
5 Touc h Copy It.
Copying dierent paper sizes
Use the ADF to copy original documents with dierent paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and
the “Copy to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled
to fit a single paper size (Example 2).
Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Copying 104
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >
4 Navigate to:
Copy to > Auto Size Match >
> Copy It
The scanner identifies the dierent paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper
sizes corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.
Example 2: Copying on a single paper size
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >
4 Navigate to:
Copy to > Letter >
> Copy It
The scanner identifies the dierent paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes
to
fit
on the paper size selected.
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Copying 105
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Sides (Duplex) > select the preferred duplexing method
Note: For the preferred duplexing method, the first number represents sides of the original documents
while the second number represents sides of the copy. For example, select “2 sided to 2 sided” if you
have two-sided original documents and you want two‑sided copies.
4 Touc h > Copy It.
Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be scaled from 25% to 400% of the original document size.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch Copy.
4 From the Scale area, touch or to decrease or increase the value by 1%.
Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. This automatically adjusts the scan image of the original
document to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
5 Touc h Copy It.
Adjusting copy quality
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content
4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying.
• Text —The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/ Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
Copying 106
5 Touc h .
6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying.
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from a
film.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
7 To uc h > Copy It.
Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print the copies as a set (collated) or to print
the copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Collated Not collated
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > select the preferred order of pages >
> Copy It
Placing separator sheets between copies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Copying 107
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Separator Sheets
Note: Set Collate to “1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3” to place separator sheets between copies. If Collate is set to “1,1,1 ‑
2,2,2,” then the separator sheets are added to the end of the copy job. For more information, see
“Collating copies” on page 107.
4 Select one of the following:
• Between Copies
• Between Jobs
• Between Pages
• O
5 Touc h > Copy It.
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto
a single sheet of paper.
Notes:
• Make sure to set the paper size to letter, legal, A4, or JIS B5.
• Make sure to set the copy size to 100%.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Paper Saver > select the output you want >
> Copy It
Note: If Paper Saver is set to
O,
then the Print Page Borders option is unavailable.
Creating a custom copy job
The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy
job. Each set may be scanned using dierent job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job
is enabled, the scanner scans the
first
set of original documents using the
specified
settings, and then it scans
the next set with the same or
dierent
settings.
The
definition
of a set depends on the scan source:
• If you scan a document on the scanner glass, then a set consists of one page.
• If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF tray becomes
empty.
• If you scan one page using the ADF, then a set consists of one page.
Copying 108
For example:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Custom Job > On >
> Copy It
Note: When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.
4 Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass, and
then touch Scan from automatic feeder or Scan from flatbed.
Note: Change the scan job settings, if necessary.
5 If you have another document to scan, then repeat the previous step. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.
Placing information on copies
Placing a header or footer on pages
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Header/Footer > select where you want to place the header or footer > select
the type of header or footer you want
4 Enter the required information depending on the header or footer you selected, and then touch Done.
5 Touc h , and then press .
Placing an overlay message on each page
An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom,
and Draft.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Copying 109
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Overlay > select overlay message > Done > Copy It
Canceling a copy job
Canceling a copy job while the original document is in the ADF
When the ADF begins processing a document, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel.
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
From the home screen, touch Cancel Job.
Canceling appears on the display. When the job is canceled, the Copy screen appears.
Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed
1 From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2 Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press
on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.
Understanding the copy options
Copy from
This option opens a screen where you can select the paper size of the original document.
• Touch the paper size that matches the original document.
• To copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width, touch Mixed Sizes.
• To set the printer to automatically detect the size of the original document, touch Auto Size Sense.
Copy to
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed.
• Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.
• If the settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are dierent, then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale
setting to accommodate the dierence.
Copying 110
• If the paper type or size that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, then touch Manual
Feeder, and manually load the paper in the multipurpose feeder.
• When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the paper size of the original document. If a
matching paper size is not in one of the trays, then Paper size not found appears and prompts to
load a paper in a tray or multipurpose feeder.
Scale
This option lets you scale the document from 25% to 400% of the original document size. You can also set
automatic scaling.
• When copying to a dierent paper size, such as from legal‑size to letter‑size paper, set the “Copy from” and
“Copy to” paper sizes automatically to scale the scan image to fit the size of the paper onto which you are
copying.
• To decrease or increase the value by 1%, touch or on the printer control panel. To make a continuous
decrease or increase in value, hold the button for two seconds or more.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the copies are in relation to the original document.
Sides (Duplex)
This option lets you make one- or two-sided copies from one- or two-sided original documents.
Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document.
Copies
This option lets you set the number of copies to be printed.
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Text —The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/ Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
Copying 111
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from
film.
• Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
• Advanced Duplex—This specifies the document orientation, whether documents are one-sided or two-
sided, and how documents are bound.
• Advanced Imaging—This changes or adjusts Auto Center, Background Removal, Color Balance, Color
Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness
settings before you copy the document.
• Create Booklet—This creates a booklet. You can choose between one‑sided and two‑sided.
Note: This option appears only when a hard disk is installed.
• Cover Page Setup—This sets up the cover page of copies and booklets.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge.
• Header/Footer—This inserts date or time, page number, Bates number, or custom text, and then prints them
in the specified header or footer location.
• Margin Shift—This increases or reduces the size of the margin of a page by shifting the scanned image.
Touc h
or to set the margin you want. If the additional margin is too large, then the copy is cropped.
• Overlay—This creates a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose
from Urgent,
Confidential,
Copy, and Draft, or you can enter a custom message in the ”Enter custom text”
field. The word you pick appears, faintly, in large print across each page.
• Paper Saver—This prints two or more pages of an original document on the same page. Paper Saver is also
called N-up printing where N stands for the number of pages.
• Separator Sheets—This places a blank sheet of paper between copies, pages, or print jobs. The separator
sheets can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is dierent from the paper your
copies are printed on.
• Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then
displays an error message.
Note: This option is supported only in some printer models.
Copying 112
E-mailing
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
ABC
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards
or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings).
Setting up the printer to e-mail
Setting up the e-mail function
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3 Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.
Configuring
e‑mail settings
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3 Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.
E-mailing 113
Creating an e-mail shortcut
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings.
3 From the Other Settings column, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
4 Type a unique name for the e‑mail recipient, and then type the e‑mail address. If you are entering multiple
addresses, then separate each address with a comma.
5 Click Add.
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient > type an e‑mail address
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.
2 To uc h Subject, then type the e‑mail subject, and then touch Done.
3 Touc h Message, then type your message, and then touch Done.
4 Adjust the e‑mail settings.
Note: If you change the settings after the e‑mail shortcut has been created, then the settings are not
saved.
5 Touc h .
6 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
7 Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Notes:
• The shortcut name appears in the E-mail Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
• You can use the shortcut when e‑mailing another document using the same settings.
E-mailing 114
E-mailing a document
You can use the printer to e‑mail scanned documents to one or more recipients in a number of ways. You can
type the e‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send or
MyShortcut application from the printer home screen. For more information, see
“Activating the home screen
applications” on page 22.
Sending an e-mail using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure that the size of the original document and the copy paper
size are the same.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s)
4 Type the e‑mail address, or press # using the keypad, and then enter the shortcut number.
Notes:
• To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number
you want to add.
• You can also enter an e‑mail address using the address book.
5 Touc h Done > Send It.
Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press #, then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch .
Note: To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number
that you want to add.
4 Touc h Send It.
E-mailing 115
Sending an e‑mail using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > > type the name of the recipient > Search
4 Touch the name of the recipient.
Note: To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number
that you want to add, or search the address book.
5 Touc h Done.
Customizing e-mail settings
Adding e-mail subject and message information
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address > Done
4 Touc h Subject, then type the e‑mail subject, and then touch Done.
5 Touc h Message, then type your message, and then touch Done.
Changing the output file type
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address > Done > Send as
E-mailing 116
3 Select the file type you want to send.
Note: If you select Secure PDF, then you will be prompted to enter your password twice.
4 Touc h > Send It.
Canceling an e-mail
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears, or while Scan the Next
Page / Finish the Job appears.
Understanding the e-mail options
Recipient(s)
This option lets you enter the recipient of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e‑mail addresses.
Subject
This option lets you type a subject line for your e-mail.
Message
This option lets you type a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.
File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.
Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to e‑mail. When Original Size is set to
Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-
mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces
the
file
size.
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
E-mailing 117
Select from the following content types:
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Text —The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/ Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from
film.
• Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark your scanned documents are in relation to the original document.
Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
• PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages. This can be sent as a secured or compressed file.
• TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned o in the Settings menu of
the Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an
equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document.
• XPS—Use this to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
• RTF—Use this to create a
file
in editable format.
• TXT—Use this to create an ASCII text
file
with no formatting.
Note: To use the RTF or TXT option, purchase and install the AccuRead
TM
OCR solution.
E-mailing 118
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the
paper. This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex)
and Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This
specifies
if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG
Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature
settings before you e‑mail the document.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever
is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then
displays an error message.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.
E-mailing 119
Faxing
Note: Fax capabilities are available only in some printer models.
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
ABC
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards
or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings).
Setting up the printer to fax
Initial fax setup
Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top
or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: fax name (identification of the
business, other entity, or individual sending the message) and fax number (telephone number of the sending
fax machine, business, other entity, or individual). For more information, see
“Regulatory notices for
telecommunication terminal equipment” on page 370.
To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded
Web Server and then enter the Settings menu.
Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax
setup information.
Using the printer control panel for fax setup
When the printer is turned on for the first time, a series of start‑up screens appear. If the printer has fax
capabilities, then the Fax Name and Fax Number screens appear.
1 When the Fax Name screen appears, do the following:
a Enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
b Enter the fax name, and then touch Submit.
2 When the Fax Number screen appears, enter the fax number, and then touch Submit.
Faxing 120
Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4 In the Fax Number
field,
enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.
Choosing a fax connection
Setting up fax using a standard telephone line
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
Faxing 121
Setup 1: Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
Notes:
• You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On) or manually (Auto Answer O).
• If you want to receive faxes automatically, then set the printer to pick up on any number of rings that you
want.
Faxing 122
Setup 2: Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine
Note: If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service provided by your telephone company, then make sure that
you set the correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have
set it to receive faxes automatically.
Connected to the same telephone wall jack
PHONE
LINE
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3 Connect the answering machine to the telephone port of the printer.
Faxing 123
Connected to dierent wall jacks
PHONE
LIN
E
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
Notes:
• If you have only one telephone number on your line, then set the printer to receive faxes automatically.
• Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine. For example, if the answering
machine picks up calls after four rings, then set the printer Rings to Answer setting to six.
Faxing 124
Setup 3: Printer is sharing the line with a telephone subscribed to voice mail service
02
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3 Connect the telephone to the telephone port of the printer.
Notes:
• This setup works best if you are using voice mail more often than fax, and if you subscribe to a
distinctive ring service.
• When you answer the telephone and you hear fax tones, press *9* or the manual answer code on the
telephone to receive the fax.
• You can also set the printer to receive faxes automatically, but turn o the voice mail service when you
are expecting a fax.
Faxing 125
Setting up fax using digital subscriber line
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
Digital subscriber line (DSL) splits your regular telephone line into two channels: voice and Internet. Telephone
and fax signals travel through the voice channel, and internet signals pass through the other channel.
Install a DSL filter to minimize interference between the two channels and ensure a quality connection.
Note: Contact your DSL provider to obtain a DSL
filter.
1 Connect the line port of the DSL filter to the wall jack.
2 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer. Connect the other end to the phone
port on the DSL filter.
Faxing 126
3 To connect a telephone to the printer, remove any installed adapter plug from the telephone port of the
printer, and then connect the telephone.
Setting up fax using VoIP telephone service
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
Faxing 127
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the VoIP adapter.
Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge extra
cost for the activation of the second phone port.
3 Connect the telephone to the telephone port of the printer.
Notes:
• To check if the telephone port on the VoIP adapter is active, plug an analog telephone into the port, and
then listen for a dial tone.
• If you need two phone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay extra cost, then use a phone
splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port, and then plug the
printer and telephone into the splitter.
• To check the splitter, plug an analog telephone into the splitter, and then listen for a dial tone.
Setting up fax using cable modem connection
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
Faxing 128
Setup 1: Printer is connected directly to a cable modem
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the cable modem.
3 Connect your analog telephone to the telephone port of the printer.
Note: To check if the telephone port on the cable modem is active, connect an analog telephone, and then
listen for a dial tone.
Faxing 129
Setup 2: Printer is connected to a wall jack; cable modem is installed elsewhere in the facility
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3 Connect your analog telephone to the telephone port of the printer.
Setting up fax in countries or regions with dierent telephone wall jacks and plugs
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ11. If the wall jack or equipment in your facility
is not compatible with this type of connection, then use a telephone adapter. An adapter for your country or
region may not come with your printer, and you may need to purchase it separately.
Faxing 130
There may be an adapter plug installed in the telephone port of the printer. Do not remove the adapter plug
from the telephone port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded telephone system.
Part name Part number
Lexmark adapter plug 40X8519
Connecting the printer to a non‑RJ11 wall jack
Faxing 131
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.
3 If you want to connect another device with a non‑RJ11 connector to the same wall jack, then connect it
directly to the telephone adapter.
Connecting the printer to a wall jack in Germany
The German wall jack has two kinds of ports. The N ports are for fax machines, modems, and answering
machines. The F port is for telephones. Connect the printer to any of the N ports.
NFN
P
H
O
N
E
LIN
E
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the RJ11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to an N
port.
3 If you want to connect a telephone and answering machine to the same wall jack, then connect the devices
as shown.
Faxing 132
Connecting to a distinctive ring service
A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone company. This service lets you have multiple
telephone numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a dierent ring pattern. This
may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then
follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3 Change the distinctive rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer.
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This sets the printer to answer single, double,
and triple ring patterns.
a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Answer On
b Select the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch Submit.
Setting the outgoing fax name and number
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4 In the Fax Number
field,
enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.
Faxing 133
Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 In the Manually Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.
4 Click Submit.
Note: It is recommended to use the network time.
Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 Select the Automatically Observe DST check box, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom
Time Zone Setup section.
4 Click Submit.
Sending a fax
You can use the printer to send a fax to one or more recipients in a number of ways. You can type the e‑mail
address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut
application from the printer home screen. For more information, see
“Activating the home screen applications”
on page 22.
Sending a fax using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Faxing 134
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut.
Note: To add recipients, touch Next number, and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut
number, or search the address book.
5 Touc h Fax It.
Sending a fax using the computer
For Windows users
1
From the document that you are trying to fax, open the Print dialog.
2 Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Click Fax > Enable fax, and then enter the recipient fax number or numbers.
4 If necessary, configure other fax settings.
5 Apply the changes, and then send the fax job.
Notes:
• The fax option is available only with the PostScript® driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For more
information, go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
• To use the fax option with the PostScript driver, configure and enable it in the Configuration tab.
For Macintosh users
1
With a document open, choose File > Print.
2 Select the printer.
3 Enter the recipient fax number, and then configure other fax settings, if necessary.
4 Send the fax job.
Sending a fax using a shortcut number
Fax shortcuts are like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or a fax machine. A shortcut number (1–999) can
contain a single recipient or multiple recipients.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Faxing 135
3 From the printer control panel, press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
4 Touc h Fax It.
Sending a fax using the address book
The address book lets you search for bookmarks and network directory servers. For more information on
enabling the address book feature, contact your system support person.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > > type the name of the recipient > Search
Note: You can search only for one name at a time.
4 Touch the name of the recipient, and then touch Fax It.
Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options > Delayed Send
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, then the Delayed Send button does not appear. Faxes waiting for
transmission are listed in the fax queue.
4 Specify the time the fax will be transmitted, and then touch .
5 Touc h Fax It.
Note: The document is scanned, and then faxed at the scheduled time.
Faxing 136
Creating shortcuts
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a shortcut number to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system
support person.
3 Type a name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
Notes:
• To create a multiple‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
• Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
4 Assign a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5 Click Add.
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
Note: To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.
2 To uc h .
3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
Note: If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Faxing 137
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4 From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to select the resolution you want.
Note: Select a resolution from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (best quality at a reduced speed).
5 Touc h Fax It.
Making a fax lighter or darker
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4 Adjust the fax darkness, and then touch Fax It.
Viewing a fax log
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Reports.
3 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.
Blocking junk faxes
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Faxing 138
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.
Notes:
• This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or have no fax name.
• In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or type the fax names of specific fax callers
you want to block.
Canceling an outgoing fax
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears or
while Scan the Next Page and Finish the Job appear.
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to
memory
1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.
2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch
the job you want to cancel.
3 Touc h Delete Selected Jobs.
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen
appears.
Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released
manually or at a scheduled day or time.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.
Faxing 139
3 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
• O
• Always On
• Manual
• Scheduled
4 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:
a Click Fax Holding Schedule.
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
5 Click Add.
Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select Print, Print and Forward, or Forward.
4 From the “Forward to” menu, select Fax, E‑mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF.
5 In the “Forward to Shortcut” field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.
6 Click Submit.
Understanding the fax options
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the quality of the fax output. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size
and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Select one of the following:
• Standard—Use this when faxing most documents.
• Fine 200 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with small prints.
• Super fine 300 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with fine details.
• Ultra fine 600 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with pictures or photos.
Faxing 140
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the faxes are in relation to the original document.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on one side or on both sides of the page
(duplex). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex)
and Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This
specifies
if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Select from the following content types:
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Text —The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/ Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from
film.
• Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Delayed Send
This option lets you send a fax at a later time or date.
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Faxing 141
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror
Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before
you fax the document.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is
within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then shows
an error message.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.
Faxing 142
Scanning
Using Scan to Network
Scan to Network lets you scan your documents to network destinations specified by your system support
person. After the destinations (shared network folders) have been established on the network, the setup
process for the application involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer using
its Embedded Web Server. For more information, see
“Setting up Scan to Network” on page 24.
Scanning to an FTP address
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
ABC
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards
or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address
may be sent to the server at a time.
When an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination
becomes available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination
could also be another PostScript printer; for example, a color document can be scanned and then sent to a
color printer.
Creating shortcuts
Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a
document to an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There
are two methods for creating shortcut numbers: using the Embedded Web Server and using the printer control
panel.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Scanning 143
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Navigate to:
Settings > Other Settings area > Manage Shortcuts > FTP Shortcut Setup
3 Enter the appropriate information.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system
support person.
4 Enter a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5 Click Add.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address >
> type a name for the shortcut > Done
2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
Notes:
• If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
• If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
Scanning to an FTP address
You can use the printer to send scanned documents to an FTP address in a number of ways. You can type the
FTP address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send, Scan to Network,
or MyShortcut application from the printer home screen. For more information, see
“Activating the home screen
applications” on page 22.
Scanning to an FTP address using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > Done > Send It
Scanning 144
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press # on the keypad, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.
4 Touc h > Send It.
Scanning an FTP using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > > type the name of the recipient > Search
4 Touch the name of the recipient.
Note: To search for additional recipients, touch New Search, and then type the name of the next
recipient.
5 Touc h > Send It.
Scanning 145
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
ABC
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards
or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to
be directly connected to the printer for you to receive scan to computer images. You can scan the document
back to the computer over the network by creating a scan
profile
on the computer and then downloading the
profile
to the printer.
Scanning to a computer using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Scan
Profile
> Create Scan
Profile
.
3 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.
4 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scan image.
5 Type a scan name, and then a user name.
Note: The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan
Profile
list on the display.
6 Click Submit.
Note: Clicking Submit automatically assigns a shortcut number. You can use this shortcut number when
you are ready to scan your documents.
7 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.
a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Scanning 146
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
b If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
c Do either of the following:
• Press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
• From the home screen, navigate to:
Held Jobs > Profiles > select your shortcut on the list
Note: The scanner scans and sends the document to the directory you
specified.
8 View the
file
from the computer.
Note: The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.
Setting up Scan to Computer
Notes:
• This feature is supported only in Windows Vista or later.
• Make sure your computer and printer are connected to the same network.
1 Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
Note: If your printer is not in the list, then add your printer.
2 Open the printer properties, and then adjust the settings as necessary.
3 From the control panel, touch Scan to Computer > select the appropriate scan setting > Send It.
Scanning to a
flash
drive
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.
Note: The USB Drive home screen appears.
4 Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.
Note: The printer goes back to the home screen after 30 seconds of inactivity.
5 Adjust the scan settings, and then touch Scan It.
Scanning 147
Understanding the scan options
FTP
This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
File Name
This option lets you type a file name for the scan image.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to
Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the scanned documents are in relation to the original document.
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size
and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
• PDF—Use to create a single file with multiple pages. The PDF can be sent as a secured or compressed file.
• TIFF—Use to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned o in the Settings menu, then
TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of the original document.
• XPS—Use to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
• RTF—Use to create a file in editable format.
• TXT—Use to create ASCII text
file
with no formatting.
Note: To use the RTF or TXT option, purchase and install the AccuRead OCR solution.
Scanning 148
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Text —The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/ Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from
film.
• Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the
paper.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex)
and Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the file. When the first page is
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG
Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature
settings before you scan the document.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is
within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
Scanning 149
• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then shows
an error message.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.
Scanning 150
Understanding the printer menus
Menus list
Paper Menu Reports Network/Ports Security
Default Source
Paper Size/Type
Configure MP
Substitute Size
Paper Texture
Paper Weight
Paper Loading
Custom Types
Custom Names
Custom Scan Sizes
Custom Bin Names
Universal Setup
Bin Setup
Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics
Stapler Test
Network Setup Page
Network [x] Setup Page
Shortcut List
Fax Job Log
Fax Call Log
Copy Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles
List
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Print Demo
Asset Report
Active NIC
Standard Network
1
Standard USB
Parallel [x]
Serial [x]
SMTP Setup
Edit Security Setups
Miscellaneous Security Settings
Confidential Print
Erase Temporary Data Files
Security Audit Log
Set Date and Time
Settings Help Manage Shortcuts
Option Card Menu
2
General Settings
Copy Settings
Fax Settings
E‑mail Settings
FTP Settings
Flash Drive Menu
OCR Settings menu
Print Settings
Print All Guides
Copy Guide
E-mail Guide
Fax Guide
FTP Guide
Print Defects Guide
Information Guide
Supplies Guide
Fax Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Copy Shortcuts
Profile
Shortcuts
A list of installed DLEs (Download
Emulators) appears.
1
Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Standard Network or Network [x].
2
This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.
Understanding the printer menus 151
Paper menu
Default Source menu
Use To
Default Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Notes:
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for
Multipurpose Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
• If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays
have the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked.
When one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.
Configure
MP menu
Use To
Configure MP
Cassette
Manual
First
Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
• Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the
multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.
• Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual‑feed print jobs.
• First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper
source.
Understanding the printer menus 152
Paper Size/Type menu
Use To
Tray [x] Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS‑B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the paper size loaded in each tray.
Notes:
• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
• If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays
have the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. The
multipurpose feeder may also be linked. When one tray is empty,
the print job continues using the linked tray.
• The A6 paper size is supported only in Tray 1 and in the
multipurpose feeder.
Tray [x] Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray.
Notes:
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x]
is the factory default setting for all other trays.
• If available, a user‑
defined
name will appear instead of Custom
Type [x].
• Use this menu to
configure
automatic tray linking.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 153
Use To
MP Feeder Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio
(Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” for MP
Feeder Size to appear as a menu.
• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size.
The paper size value must be set.
MP Feeder Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure to “Cassette” for MP Feeder
Type to appear as a menu.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 154
Use To
Manual Paper Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio
(Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the paper type being manually loaded.
Notes:
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Manual” for Manual
Paper Type to appear as a menu.
Manual Envelope Size
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the envelope size being manually loaded.
Note: 10 Envelope is the U.S. factory default setting. DL Envelope is the
international factory default setting.
Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Custom Type [x]
Specify the envelope type being manually loaded.
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 155
Use To
Default ADF Media Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom [x]
Specify the media type being loaded in the ADF.
Note: Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Substitute Size menu
Use To
Substitute Size
O
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
All Listed
Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not
available.
Notes:
• All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.
• O indicates that no size substitutions are allowed.
• Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change
Paper appearing.
Paper Texture menu
Use To
Plain Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded in a specific tray.
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• These options appear only if card stock is supported.
Understanding the printer menus 156
Use To
Transparency Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Vinyl Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the vinyl labels loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough Envelope Texture
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Letterhead Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the light paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 157
Use To
Heavy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the heavy paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough/Cotton Texture
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the rough or cotton paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Custom [x] Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Paper Weight menu
Use To
Plain Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Transparency Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Vinyl Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the vinyl labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 158
Use To
Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Letterhead Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light Weight
Light
Specify that the weight of the paper loaded is light.
Heavy Weight
Heavy
Specify that the weight of the paper loaded is heavy.
Rough/Cotton Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the cotton or rough paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Custom [x] Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded.
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only when the custom type is supported.
Understanding the printer menus 159
Paper Loading menu
Use To
Card Stock Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Card
Stock as the paper type.
Recycled Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with
Recycled as the paper type.
Labels Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Labels
as the paper type.
Vinyl Labels Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Vinyl
Labels as the paper type.
Bond Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Bond
as the paper type.
Letterhead Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with
Letterhead as the paper type.
Preprinted Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with
Preprinted as the paper type.
Colored Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with
Colored as the paper type.
Light Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Light
as the paper type.
Heavy Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Heavy
as the paper type.
Rough/Cotton Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Rough
or Cotton as the paper type.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.
• Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected
from Print Properties or the print dialog, depending on your operating system.
Understanding the printer menus 160
Use To
Custom [x] Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with
Custom [x] as the paper type.
Note: Custom [x] Loading is available only when the custom
type is supported.
Notes:
•
O
is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.
• Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected
from Print Properties or the print dialog, depending on your operating system.
Custom Types menu
Use To
Custom Type [x]
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default custom
type name or a user‑defined custom name created from the Embedded
Web Server or from MarkVision
TM
Professional.
Notes:
• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Recycled
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected in other menus.
Notes:
• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Custom Names menu
Use To
Custom Name [x] Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces Custom Type
[x] in the printer menus.
Understanding the printer menus 161
Custom Scan Sizes menu
Use To
Custom Scan Size [x]
Scan Size Name
Media Type
ADF Media Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Width
1–8.5 inches (25–216 mm)
Height
1–25 inches (25–635 mm)
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
2 scans per side
O
On
Specify a custom scan size name, sizes, and orientation. The custom scan
size name replaces Custom Scan Size [x] in the printer menus.
Notes:
• Rough/Cotton is the factory default setting for custom scan sizes 1
and 2.
• ADF Media Type is the factory default setting for custom scan sizes
3, 4, 5, and 6.
• 8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Width. 216 mm is the
international factory default setting for Width.
• 14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Height. 356 mm is the
international factory default setting for Height.
• Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.
• O is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side.
Custom Bin Names menu
Use To
Standard Bin Specify a custom name for the standard bin.
Bin [x] Specify a custom name for Bin [x].
Understanding the printer menus 162
Universal Setup menu
Use To
Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters
Identify the units of measure.
Notes:
• Inches is the US factory default setting.
• Millimeters is the international factory default setting.
Portrait Width
3–8.5 inches
76–216 mm
Set the portrait width.
Notes:
• If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum width allowed.
• 8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. You can increase
the width in 0.01‑inch increments.
• 216 mm is the international factory default setting. You can
increase the width in 1‑mm increments.
Portrait Height
3–14.17 inches
76–360 mm
Set the portrait height.
Notes:
• If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum height allowed.
• 14 inches is the US factory default setting. You can increase the
height in 0.01‑inch increments.
• 356 mm is the international factory default setting. You can
increase the height in 1‑mm increments.
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge
Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either
direction.
Notes:
• Short Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than
the maximum width supported in the tray.
Bin Setup menu
Use To
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify the default bin.
Notes:
• If multiple bins are assigned the same name, then
the name appears only once in the menu.
• Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
• [x] can be any number between 1 and 4 if the
appropriate optional bins are installed.
Understanding the printer menus 163
Use To
Configure Bins
Mailbox
Link
Mail Overflow
Link Optional
Type Assignment
Specify configuration options for bins.
Notes:
• Mailbox is the factory default setting. This treats
each bin as a separate mailbox.
• Link configures all available bins as one large bin.
• Mail Overflow configures each bin as a separate
mailbox.
• Link Optional links together all available bins
except the standard bin and only appears when
at least two optional bins are installed.
• Type Assignment assigns each paper type to a
bin or linked bin set.
• Bins assigned the same name are automatically
linked unless Link Optional is selected.
Overflow Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify an alternative bin when a designated bin is full.
Notes:
• Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
• If multiple bins are assigned the same name, then
the name only appears once in the bin list.
• [x] can be any number between 1 and 4 if the
appropriate optional bins are installed.
Assign Type/Bin
Plain Paper Bin
Card Stock Bin
Transparency Bin
Recycled Bin
Labels Bin
Vinyl Labels Bin
Bond Bin
Envelope Bin
Rough Envelope Bin
Letterhead Bin
Preprinted Bin
Colored Bin
Light Paper Bin
Heavy Paper Bin
Rough/Cotton Bin
Custom [x] Bin
Select a bin for each supported paper type.
For each type, select from the following options:
Disabled
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Notes:
• Disabled is the factory default setting.
• [x] can be any number between 1 and 4 if the
appropriate optional bins are installed.
• If multiple bins are assigned the same name, then
the name appears only once in the bin list.
Understanding the printer menus 164
Reports menu
Reports menu
Use To
Menu Settings Page Print a report on the current printer menu settings. The report also contains
information about the status of the supplies and a list of hardware options
that are successfully installed.
Device Statistics Print a report containing printer statistics, such as supply information and
the number of printed pages.
Stapler Test Print a report that confirms whether the staple finisher is functioning
properly.
Note: This menu item appears only when a supported staple finisher is
installed.
Network Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network settings of the
printer.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers
connected to print servers.
Network [x] Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network settings of the
printer.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers
connected to print servers, and when there is more than one network
option installed.
Shortcut List Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts.
Fax Job Log Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the
Fax Settings menu.
• This menu is supported only in some printer models.
Fax Call Log Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received,
and blocked calls.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the
Fax Settings menu.
• This menu is supported only in some printer models.
Copy Shortcuts Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts.
E‑mail Shortcuts Print a report containing information about e‑mail shortcuts.
Fax Shortcuts Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts.
FTP Shortcuts Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts.
Profiles List Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.
Understanding the printer menus 165
Use To
Print Fonts Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set
in the printer.
Print Directory Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or
hard disk.
Notes:
• Job Buer Size must be set to 100%.
• Make sure that the memory card or hard disk is installed and working
correctly.
Asset Report Print a report containing asset information, including the printer serial
number and model name. The report contains text and UPC bar codes that
can be scanned into an asset database.
Event Log Summary Print a summary of logged events.
Network/Ports menu
Active NIC menu
Use To
Active NIC
Auto
[list of available network cards]
Allow the printer to connect to a network.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only if an optional network adapter is installed.
Standard Network or Network [x] menu
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu.
Use To
Energy Ecient Ethernet
Enable
Disable
Reduce power consumption when the printer receives no data from the
Ethernet network.
Note: Enable is the factory default setting.
PCL SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job
requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• If PCL SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine
incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu.
Understanding the printer menus 166
Use To
PS SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• If PS SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine
incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu.
NPA Mode
O
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel.
Network Buer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the network input buer.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the
printer, the size of the other link
buers,
and whether Resource Save is
set to On or O.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buers.
• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel.
Job Buering
O
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing. This menu
only appears when a formatted disk is installed.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Standard Network Setup OR
Network [x] Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
Show and set the printer network settings.
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a
wireless network.
Understanding the printer menus 167
Reports menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports
Use To
Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP
address.
Network Card menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Use To
View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected
View the connection status of the wireless network adapter.
View Card Speed View the speed of an active wireless network adapter.
Network Address
UAA
LAA
View the network addresses.
Job Timeout
0, 10–225 seconds
Set the time before the printer cancels a network print job.
Notes:
• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.
• 0 disables the timeout.
Banner Page
O
On
Set the printer to print a banner page.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
TCP/IP menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > TCP/IP
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.
Use To
Set Hostname Set the current TCP/IP host name.
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Understanding the printer menus 168
Use To
IP Address View or change the current TCP/IP address.
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto
IP settings to
O.
It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to
O
on
systems that support BOOTP and RARP.
Netmask View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.
Gateway View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.
Enable DHCP
On
O
Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable RARP
On
O
Specify the RARP address assignment setting.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Enable BOOTP
On
O
Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable AutoIP
Ye s
No
Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable FTP/TFTP
Ye s
No
Enable the built-in FTP server, which lets you send files to the printer using File
Transfer Protocol.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable HTTP Server
Ye s
No
Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the
printer can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
WINS Server Address View or change the current WINS server address.
Enable DDNS
Ye s
No
View or change the current DDNS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable mDNS
Ye s
No
View or change the current mDNS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
DNS Server Address View or change the current DNS server address.
Backup DNS Server Address View or change the backup DNS server addresses.
Backup DNS Server Address 2
Backup DNS Server Address 3
Enable HTTPS
Ye s
No
View or change the current HTTPS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 169
IPv6 menu
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
• Network/Ports menu > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > IPv6
• Network/Ports menu > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Use To
Enable IPv6
On
O
Enable IPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Auto Configuration
On
O
Specify whether or not the network adapter accepts the automatic
IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Set Hostname Set the host name.
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded
Web Server.
View Address
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6
On
O
Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Wireless menu
Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to a wireless network or printer models that have a
wireless network adapter.
To access the menu, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless
Use To
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
Start Push Button Method
Start PIN Method
Establish a wireless network and enable network security.
Notes:
• Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless
network when buttons on both the printer and the access point
(wireless router) are pressed within a given period of time.
• Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network
when a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings
of the access point.
Enable/Disable WPS Auto‑detection
Enable
Disable
Automatically detect the connection method that an access point
with WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.
Note: Disable is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 170
Use To
Network Mode
BSS Type
Infrastructure
Ad hoc
Specify the network mode.
Notes:
• Infrastructure is the factory default setting. This lets the printer
access a network using an access point.
• Ad hoc configures wireless connection directly between the
printer and a computer.
Compatibility
802.11b/g
802.11b/g/n
Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.
Note: 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.
Choose Network Select an available network for the printer to use.
View Signal Quality View the quality of the wireless connection.
View Security Mode View the encryption method for the wireless network.
AppleTalk menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk
Use To
Activate
Ye s
No
Enable or disable AppleTalk support.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
View Name Show the assigned AppleTalk name.
Note: The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded
Web Server.
View Address Show the assigned AppleTalk address.
Note: The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded
Web Server.
Set Zone
[list of zones available on the
network]
Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.
Note: The default zone for the network is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 171
Standard USB menu
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job
received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer
language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the
default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS
SmartSwitch is set to O.
PS SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the
default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL
SmartSwitch is set to
O.
NPA Mode
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then process it appropriately.
• The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the
printer control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
USB Buer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the USB input buer.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns o job buering. Any jobs already buered on the printer
hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
• The USB buer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the
printer, the size of the other link buers, and whether Resource Save is
set to On or O.
• To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and network buers.
• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
printer control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 172
Use To
Job Buering
O
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• On buers jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from
another input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
• O filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the network address information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
Parallel [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional parallel card is installed.
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job
received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer
language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the
default printer language
specified
in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is
set to O.
Understanding the printer menus 173
Use To
PS SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to
O.
NPA Mode
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Parallel Buer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the parallel input buer.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns
o
job
buering.
Any print jobs already
buered
on the
printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
• The parallel buer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the
printer, the size of the other link buers, and whether Resource Save is
set to On or
O.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buer, disable or
reduce the size of the USB, serial, and network buers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buering
O
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• On
buers
print jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from
another input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Advanced Status
On
O
Enable bidirectional communication through the parallel port.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• O disables parallel port negotiation.
Understanding the printer menus 174
Use To
Protocol
Standard
Fastbytes
Specify the parallel port protocol.
Notes:
• Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most
existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.
• Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.
Honor Init
On
O
Determine if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the
computer.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the
parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time
the computer is turned on.
Parallel Mode 2
On
O
Determine if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of
a strobe.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Mac Binary PS
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
•
O
filters
print jobs using the standard protocol.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the network address information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
Serial [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional serial card is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 175
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job
received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer
language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the
default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is
set to O.
PS SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to
O,
the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language
specified
in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to
O.
NPA Mode
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then processes it appropriately.
• When set to On, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data is not in
NPA format, it is rejected as bad data.
• When set to O, the printer does not perform NPA processing.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Serial Buer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the serial input buer.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns
o
job
buering.
Any jobs already
buered
on the disk are
printed before normal processing is resumed.
• The serial buer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the
printer, the size of the other link buers, and whether Resource Save is
set to On or
O.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and network buers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 176
Use To
Job Buering
O
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting. The printer does not buer print jobs on
the printer hard disk.
• On buers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from
another input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Protocol
DTR
DTR/DSR
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF/DTR
XONXOFF/DTRDSR
Select the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port.
Notes:
• DTR is the factory default setting.
• DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.
• XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.
• XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and
software handshaking settings.
Robust XON
On
O
Determine whether the printer communicates availability to the computer.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to
XON/XOFF.
Baud
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
138200
172800
230400
345600
Specify the rate at which data can be received through the serial port.
Notes:
• 9600 is the factory default setting.
• 138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in
the Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial
Option 1, Serial Option 2, or Serial Option 3 menus.
Data Bits
7
8
Specify the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
Parity
Even
Odd
None
Ignore
Set the parity for serial input and output data frames.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 177
Use To
Honor DSR
On
O
Determine whether the printer uses the DSR Signal.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables. The serial port
uses DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by
electrical noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray
characters to print. Set this to On to prevent stray characters from
printing.
SMTP Setup menu
Use To
Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout
5–30
Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying
to send an e‑mail.
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Reply Address Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by
the printer.
Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required
Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to
the SMTP server.
Notes:
• Disabled is the factory default setting.
• When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server
determines if SSL will be used.
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5
Specify the type of user authentication required for scan‑to e‑mail
privileges.
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 178
Use To
Device‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the
SMTP server. Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e-
mail.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Device‑Initiated E‑mail
and User‑Initiated E‑mail.
• Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the
SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.
User‑Initiated E‑mail
*
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID & Password
Use Session E‑mail address & Password
Prompt User
Device Userid
Device Password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain
Security menu
Edit Security Setups menu
Use To
Edit Backup Password
Use Backup Password
• O
• On
Password
Create a backup password.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting for “Use Backup Password.”
• This menu item appears only if a backup password exists.
Edit Building Blocks
Internal Accounts
NTLM
Simple Kerberos Setup
Kerberos Setup
Active Directory
LDAP
LDAP+GSSAPI
Password
PIN
Edit settings for Internal Accounts, NTLM, Simple Kerberos Setup, Kerberos
Setup, Active Directory, LDAP, Password, and PIN.
Edit Security Templates
[list of available templates]
Add or edit a security template.
Understanding the printer menus 179
Use To
Edit Access Controls
Administrative Menus
Function Access
Management
Solutions
Cancel jobs at the Device
Control access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access
points.
Miscellaneous Security Settings menu
Use To
Login Restrictions
Login failures
Failure time frame
Lockout time
Panel Login Timeout
Remote Login Timeout
Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer
control panel before all users are locked out.
Notes:
• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users
are locked out. Settings range from 1 to 10 attempts. “3 attempts” is the
factory default setting.
• “Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1
to 60 minutes. “5 minutes” is the factory default setting.
• “Lockout time”
specifies
how long users are locked out after exceeding
the login failures limit. Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes. “5 minutes” is
the factory default setting. 1 indicates that the printer does not impose a
lockout time.
• Panel Login Timeout specifies how long the printer remains idle on the
home screen before automatically logging o the user. Settings range
from 1 to 900 seconds. “30 seconds” is the factory default setting.
• Remote Login Timeout specifies how long a remote interface remains
idle before automatically logging o the user. Settings range from 1 to 120
minutes. “10 minutes” is the factory default setting.
Security Reset Jumper
No
Eect
Access controls=“No Security”
Reset factory security defaults
Adjust the security settings.
Notes:
• No Eect means the reset has no eect on the printer security
configuration.
• Access controls=’No Security’ retains all the security information that the
user has defined. No Security is the factory default setting.
• “Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the
user has defined, and restores the factory default settings in the
Miscellaneous Security menu.
Understanding the printer menus 180
Use To
LDAP Certificate Verification
Demand
Try
Allow
Never
Allow the user to request a server certificate.
Notes:
• “Demand” is the factory default setting. This means a server certificate is
requested. If a bad certificate is provided or if no certificate is provided,
then the session is terminated immediately.
• “Try ” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided,
then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then
the session is terminated immediately.
• “Allow” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is
provided, then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is
provided, then it will be ignored and the session proceeds normally.
• “Never” means no server certificate is requested.
Minimum PIN Length
1–16
Limit the digit length of the personal identification number (PIN).
Note: 4 is the factory default setting.
Confidential Print menu
Use To
Max Invalid PIN
O
2–10
Set a limit on the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
• When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are
deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration
O
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores confidential print jobs.
Notes:
• If the “Confidential Job Expiration” setting is changed while confidential print
jobs reside in the printer memory or printer hard disk, then the expiration time
for those print jobs does not change to the new default value.
• If the printer is turned o, then all confidential jobs held in the printer memory
are deleted.
Repeat Job Expiration
O
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 181
Use To
Verify Job Expiration
O
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification.
Reserve Job Expiration
O
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Erase Temporary Data Files menu
Erase Temporary Data Files deletes only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by
the file system. All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros,
and held jobs.
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Use To
Wiping Mode
Auto
Specify the mode for erasing temporary data files.
Automatic Method
Single pass
Multiple pass
Mark all disk space used by a previous print job. This method does not permit
the file system to reuse this space until it has been cleared.
Notes:
• “Single pass” is the factory default setting.
• Only automatic wiping enables users to erase temporary data
files
without having to turn o the printer for an extended amount of time.
• Highly
confidential
information should be erased using only the Multiple
pass method.
Security Audit Log menu
Use To
Export Log Enable an authorized user to export the security log.
Notes:
• To export the log from the printer control panel, attach a flash drive to the
printer.
• To export the log from the Embedded Web Server, download the log to a
computer.
Understanding the printer menus 182
Use To
Delete Log
Ye s
No
Specify whether audit logs are deleted.
Configure Log
Enable Audit
Ye s
No
Enable Remote Syslog
No
Ye s
Remote Syslog Server
[256 character string]
Remote Syslog Port
1–65535
Remote Syslog Method
Normal UDP
Stunnel
Remote Syslog Facility
0–23
Log full behavior
Wrap over oldest entries
E‑mail log then delete all
entries
Specify how audit logs are configured.
Notes:
• Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log
and remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.
• Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No
is the factory default setting.
• Remote Syslog Server determines the value used to send logs to the
remote syslog server.
• Remote Syslog Port
identifies
the port over which the printer transmits
logged events to a remote server.
• Remote Syslog Method identifies the protocol used by the printer to
transmit logged events to a remote server. Normal UDP is the factory
default setting.
• Remote Syslog Facility determines the Facility value that the printer uses
when sending events to the remote syslog server. 4 is the factory default
setting.
• “Log full behavior” determines how the printer resolves if the log entirely
fills its allotted memory. “Wrap over oldest entries” is the factory default
setting.
Understanding the printer menus 183
Use To
Configure Log (continued)
Admin’s e-mail address
[256 character string]
Digitally sign exports
O
On
Severity of events to log
0–7
Remote Syslog non-logged events
No
Ye s
E-mail log cleared alert
No
Ye s
E-mail log wrapped alert
No
Ye s
E-mail % full alert
No
Ye s
% full alert level
1–99
E-mail log exported alert
No
Ye s
E-mail log settings changed alert
No
Ye s
Log line endings
LF (\n)
CR (\r)
CRLF (\r\n)
Specify how audit logs are configured.
Notes:
• “Admin’s e‑mail address” determines if administrators are
automatically
notified
of certain log events. This setting can have one
or more e‑mail addresses (separated by commas).
• “Digitally sign exports” determines if the printer automatically signs
each exported security log. O is the factory default setting.
• “Severity of events to log” records the severity value of each event. 4
is the factory default setting.
• “Remote Syslog non-logged events” determines if the printer sends
events to the remote server that have a severity level greater than
the value of the “Severity of events to log” setting. No is the factory
default setting.
• “E-mail log cleared alert” determines if the printer sends an e‑mail to
the administrator every time a log is deleted through the printer
control panel or EWS. No is the factory default setting.
• “E-mail log wrapped alert” determines if the printer sends the
administrator an e‑mail when log entries are wrapping. No is the
factory default setting.
• “E-mail % full alert” determines if the printer sends the administrator
an e‑mail when the log fills a certain amount of its allotted space. No
is the factory default setting.
• “% full alert level” determines if the space occupied by log equals or
exceeds the value of the full alert level. 90 is the factory default
setting.
• “E-mail log exported alert” determines if the printer sends the
administrator an e‑mail when there is a log exported. No is the factory
default setting.
• “E-mail log settings changed alert” determines if the printer sends the
administrator an e‑mail when the value of the Enable Audit Log
setting is toggled. No is the factory default setting.
• “Log line endings” specifies how line endings will be handled in the
log file, depending on the operating system in which the file will be
parsed or viewed. “LF (\n)” is the factory default setting.
Set Date/Time menu
Use To
Current Date and Time Set the current printer date and time.
Manually Set Date and Time Enter the printer date and time.
Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS format.
Time Zone Select the printer time zone.
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 184
Use To
Automatically Observe DST
On
O
Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end
times associated with the printer Time Zone setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight
Saving Time associated with the Time Zone setting.
Custom Time Zone Setup
UTC Oset
DST Start Week
DST Start Day
DST Start Month
DST Start Time
DST End Week
DST End Day
DST End Month
DST End Time
DST
Oset
Set up the time zone.
Enable NTP
On
O
Synchronize the clocks of devices over a network.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
NTP Server View the NTP server address.
Enable Authentication
On
O
Set the credentials when accessing the NTP server.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 185
Settings menu
General Settings menu
Use To
Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portuguese
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Greek
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese
Set the language of the text that appears on the display.
Note: Not all languages are available for all models. You may
need to install special hardware for some languages.
Show Supply Estimates
Show estimates
Do not show estimates
View the supply estimates on the control panel, Embedded
Web Server, menu settings, and device statistics reports.
Note: Show estimates is the factory default setting.
Eco-Mode
O
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper
Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• Setting Eco‑Mode to Energy or Paper may aect printer
performance, but not print quality.
ADF Loaded Beep
Enabled
Disabled
Enable an ADF beep sound when loading paper.
Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.
ADF Multi‑feed Sensor
On
O
Detect when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at
once.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 186
Use To
Quiet Mode
O
On
Reduce printer noise.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Run Initial setup
Ye s
No
Run the setup wizard.
Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Korean
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Japanese
Custom Key [x]
Specify a language and custom key information for the
keyboard on the display.
Paper Sizes
US
Metric
Specify the unit of measurement for paper sizes.
Notes:
• US is the factory default setting.
• The country or region selected in the initial setup wizard
determines the initial paper size setting.
Scan to PC Port Range
[port range]
Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking
firewall.
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 187
Use To
Displayed Information
Left side
Right side
Specify the display information on the upper corners of the
home screen.
Select from the following options:
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Custom Text [x]
Model Name
Notes:
• IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.
• Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
Displayed Information (continued)
Custom Text [x]
Customize the text to display in the upper corners of the home
screen.
Displayed Information (continued)
Black Toner
Specify the display information for Black Toner.
Select from the following options:
When to display
Do not display
Display
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
• Do not display is the factory default setting for When to
display.
• Default is the factory default setting for Message to
display.
Understanding the printer menus 188
Use To
Displayed Information (continued)
Paper Jam
Load Paper
Service Errors
Customize the displayed information for certain menus.
Select from the following options:
Display
Ye s
No
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
• No is the factory default setting for Display.
• Default is the factory default setting for Message to
display.
Home screen customization
Change Language
Copy
Copy Shortcuts
Fax
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail
E‑mail Shortcuts
FTP
FTP Shortcuts
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles and Apps
Bookmarks
Jobs by User
Forms and Favorites
Card Copy
Scan to Network
MyShortcut
Multi Send
Change the icons that appear on the home screen.
Select from the following options:
Display
Do not display
Date Format
MM‑DD‑YYYY
DD‑MM‑YYYY
YYYY‑MM‑DD
Format the printer date.
Note: MM‑DD‑YYYY is the U.S. factory default setting. DD-
MM-YYYY is the international factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 189
Use To
Time Format
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock
Format the printer time.
Note: 12 hour A.M./P.M. is the factory default setting.
Screen Brightness
20–100
Specify the brightness of the display.
Note: 100 is the factory default setting.
One Page Copy
O
On
Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Output Lighting
Normal/Standby Mode
O
Dim
Bright
Set the indicator light for the standard bin.
Notes:
• Dim is the factory default setting when Eco‑Mode is set
to Energy or Energy/Paper.
• Bright is the factory default setting when Eco‑Mode is set
to O or Paper.
Error Lighting
On
O
Set the indicator light when the printer encounters an error.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Audio Feedback
Button Feedback
On
O
Volume
1–10
Set the button volume and feedback.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.
• 5 is the factory default setting for Volume.
Tactile Touchscreen Feedback
On
O
Enable touch‑screen sensation feedback.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Show Bookmarks
Ye s
No
Specify whether to display bookmarks from the Held Jobs
area.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Allow Background Removal
On
O
Specify whether to allow image background removal.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Allow Custom Job Scans
On
O
Scan multiple jobs to one file.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Scanner Jam Recovery
Job Level
Page Level
Specify how to reload a scanned job when a paper jam occurs
in the ADF.
Note: Job Level is the factory default setting.
Web Page Refresh Rate
30–300
Specify the time between Embedded Web Server refreshes.
Note: 120 seconds is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 190
Use To
Contact Name Specify a contact name for the printer.
Note: The contact name is stored on the Embedded Web
Server.
Location Specify the printer location.
Note: The location is stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
Set an alarm when the printer requires user intervention.
Select from the following options:
O
Single
Continuous
Notes:
• Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control.
•
O
is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm.
Timeouts
Standby Mode
Disabled
1–240
Set the idle time before the printer enters a lower power state.
Note: 15 minutes is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Sleep Mode
Disabled
1–120
Set the idle time before the printer begins operating in Sleep
mode.
Notes:
• 20 minutes is the factory default setting.
• Disabled appears only when Energy Conserve is set to
O.
Timeouts
Print with Display
O
Allow printing with display o
Display on when printing
Print a job with the display turned o.
Note: Display on when printing is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout
Disabled
20 minutes
1 hour
2 hours
3 hours
6 hours
1 day
2 days
3 days
1 week
2 weeks
1 month
Set the time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
Note: 3 days is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 191
Use To
Hibernate Timeout on Connection
Hibernate
Do Not Hibernate
Set the printer to Hibernate mode even if there is an active
Ethernet connection.
Note: Hibernate is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300
Set the idle time before the display automatically returns to
Ready state.
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255
Set the printer to end a print job after it has been idle for the
specified amount of time.
Notes:
• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.
• Print Timeout is available only when using PCL
emulation.
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
15–65535
Set the time that the printer waits for more data before
canceling a print job.
Notes:
• 40 seconds is the factory default setting.
• Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation.
Timeouts
Job Hold Timeout
5–255
Set the time that the printer waits for user intervention before
it holds jobs that require unavailable resources.
Notes:
• 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a hard disk is
installed.
Error Recovery
Auto Reboot
Reboot when idle
Reboot always
Reboot never
Set the printer to restart when an error occurs.
Note: Reboot always is the factory default setting.
Error Recovery
Max Auto Reboots
1–20
Determine the number of automatic reboots the printer can
perform.
Note: 2 is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Auto Continue
Disabled
5–255
Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain
oine situations when these are not resolved within the
specified
time period.
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
On
O
Auto
Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 192
Use To
Print Recovery
Jam Assist
On
O
Set the printer to check for jammed paper automatically.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Page Protect
O
On
Set the printer to print the correct output for a page.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Accessibility Settings
Prolong Screen Timeout
On
O
Remain in the same location and reset the Screen Timeout
timer instead of returning to the home screen.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Accessibility Settings
Speech Rate
Very Slow
Slow
Normal
Fast
Faster
Very Fast
Rapid
Very Rapid
Fastest
Adjust the Voice Guidance speaking rate.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Accessibility Settings
Headphone Volume
1–10
Set the headphones volume.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Information Sent to Lexmark
Supplies and Page Usage (Anonymous)
On
O
Send anonymous device usage information to Lexmark.
Note: The default value depends on what is selected during
the initial setup.
Press Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a short
press of the Sleep button.
Note: Sleep is the factory default setting.
Press and Hold Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a long
press of the Sleep button.
Note: Do Nothing is the factory default setting.
Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now
Restore the printer factory default settings.
Note: Do Not Restore is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 193
Use To
Export Configuration File
Export
Export configuration files to a flash drive.
Export Compressed Logs File
Export
Export compressed log files to a flash drive.
Copy Settings menu
Use To
Content Type
Te xt
Graphics
Te xt/ Ph ot o
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided to 1 sided
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided
Specify whether an original document is two‑sided (duplex) or one‑sided, and
then to specify whether the copy should be two‑sided or one‑sided.
Notes:
• 1 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on one side and the
copy will also have print on one side.
• 1 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on one side, while
the copy will have print on both sides.
• 2 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on both sides, while
the copy will have print on just one side.
• 2 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on both sides, and
the copy will also have print on both sides.
Paper Saver
O
2‑up Portrait
2‑up Landscape
4‑up Portrait
4‑up Landscape
Copy two or four sheets of a document on one page.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Print Page Borders
On
O
Specify whether or not a border is printed.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 194
Use To
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: “(1,2,3) (1,2,3)” is the factory default setting.
Punch
O
2 holes
3 holes
4 holes
Specify the type of hole punch finishing to be used in a print or copy job.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Staple
O
On
Enable or disable the staple finisher.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a staple finisher is installed.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Dicult Media Letter
Dicult Media A5
Dicult
Media Legal
Dicult Media A4
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
ID Card
Specify the paper size of the original document.
Notes:
• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.
• A4 is the international factory default setting.
Copy To Source
Tray [x]
Auto Size Match
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for copy jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Transparency Separators
On
O
Place a sheet of paper between transparencies.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 195
Use To
Separator Sheets
O
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Place a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the print for the copy job.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify the bin to be used for the copy job.
Notes:
• Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
• Bin [x] appears only when at least one optional bin is installed.
Number of Copies
1–999
Specify the number of copies for the copy job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Header/Footer
[Location]
O
Date/Time
Page number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Custom text
Specify header and footer information and its location on the page.
For the location, select from the following options:
• Top left
• Top middle
• Top right
• Bottom left
• Bottom middle
• Bottom right
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting for the location.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for “Print on.”
Overlay
Confidential
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom
O
Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Custom Overlay Specify the custom overlay text.
Note: A maximum of 64 characters is allowed.
Allow priority copies
On
O
Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 196
Use To
Custom Job scanning
On
O
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single copy job.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
O
Save custom copy settings as shortcuts.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Auto Center
O
On
Automatically center the content on the page.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting
for each color threshold.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast used for the copy job.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
O
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
O
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
ADF Multi‑feed Sensor
On
O
Detect when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at once.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 197
Use To
Scan edge to edge
O
On
Allow edge‑to‑edge scanning of the original document.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Sample Copy
O
On
Create a sample copy of the original document.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Fax Settings menu
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line.
General Fax Settings
Use To
Restore Factory Defaults Restore the factory defaults of all fax settings.
Optimize Fax Compatibility Optimize fax compatibility with other fax machines.
Fax Name Specify the name of the fax in the printer.
Fax Number Specify the number assigned to the fax.
Fax ID
Fax Name
Fax Number
Specify how the fax is identified.
Note: Fax Number is the factory default setting.
Enable Manual Fax
On
O
Set the printer to fax manually, which requires a line splitter and a telephone
handset.
Notes:
•
O
is the factory default setting.
• Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax
number.
• Press # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to this setting.
Memory Use
All receive
Mostly receive
Equal
Mostly send
All send
Define the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax
jobs.
Note: Equal is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 198
Use To
Cancel Faxes
Allow
Don't Allow
Specify whether canceling of fax jobs is allowed.
Note: Allow is the factory default setting.
Caller ID
O
Primary
Alternate
Specify the type of caller ID being used.
Fax number masking
O
From left
From right
Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to mask”
setting.
Digits to Mask
0–58
Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Fax Cover Page
Fax Cover Page
O
by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Include to Field
On
O
Include from Field
On
O
From
Include Message Field
On
O
Message
Include Logo
On
O
Include Footer [x]
On
O
Footer [x]
Configure the fax cover page.
Notes:
• O by default is the factory default setting for Fax Cover Page.
•
O
is the factory default setting for all other menu items.
Understanding the printer menus 199
Fax Send Settings
Use To
Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi
Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives better print quality,
but increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
O
Long edge
Short edge
Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for
two‑sided scanning.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Content Type
Te xt
Graphics
Te xt/ Ph ot o
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 200
Use To
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Dial Prefix Enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.
Dialing Prefix Rules
Prefix Rule [x]
Establish a dialing prefix rule.
Automatic Redial
0–9
Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified
number.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Redial frequency
1–200
Specify the number of minutes between redials.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Behind a PABX
Ye s
No
Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Enable ECM
Ye s
No
Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable Fax Scans
On
O
Fax files that are scanned at the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Driver to fax
Ye s
No
Allow the print driver to send fax jobs.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
O
Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Dial Mode
To ne
Pulse
Specify the dialing sound.
Note: Tone is the factory default setting.
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
On
O
Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 201
Use To
Scan Preview
On
O
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Ye llow - B l ue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color
threshold.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast in the scanned image.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
O
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
O
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
ADF Multi‑feed Sensor
On
O
Detect when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at once.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
O
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 202
Use To
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the sharpness of a fax.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperatur e
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the
default while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Enable Color Fax Scans
O by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Enable color faxing.
Note:
O
by default is the factory default setting.
Auto Convert Color Faxes to
Mono Faxes
On
O
Convert all outgoing faxes to black and white.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Receive Settings
Use To
Enable Fax Receive
On
O
Allow the printer to receive fax jobs.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable Caller ID
On
O
Display the caller ID information of an incoming fax.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Job Waiting
None
To ner
Toner and Supplies
Remove fax jobs from the print queue when the job requires specific unavailable
resources.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Rings to Answer
1–25
Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Auto Answer
Ye s
No
Set the printer to receive faxes automatically.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Manual Answer Code
0–9
Manually enter a code on the telephone number pad to begin receiving a fax.
Notes:
• 9 is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is used when the printer shares a line with a telephone.
Auto Reduction
On
O
Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the
designated fax source.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 203
Use To
Paper Source
Auto
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
O
On
Enable two‑sided printing for incoming fax jobs.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheets
O
Before Job
After Job
Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify a bin for received faxes.
Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Fax Footer
On
O
Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received
fax.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Fax Forwarding
Print
Print and Forward
Forward
Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Forward to
Fax
E‑mail
FTP
LDSS
eSF
Specify the type of recipient to which faxes are forwarded.
Notes:
• Fax is the factory default setting.
• This menu is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.
Forward to Shortcut Enter the shortcut number that matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP,
LDSS, or eSF).
Block No Name Fax
O
On
Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID or fax
ID specified.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Banned Fax List Enable the list of blocked fax numbers stored in the printer.
Understanding the printer menus 204
Use To
Holding Faxes
Held Fax Mode
O
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Fax Holding Schedule
Enable the printer to hold received faxes from printing until they are released.
Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Punch
O
On
Specify whether prints are punched.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Staple
O
1 staple
Specify whether prints are stapled.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Enable Color Fax Receive
On
O
Enable the printer to receive fax in color and print it in grayscale.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Log Settings
Use To
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Receive Error Log
Print Never
Print on Error
Enable printing of a received error log.
Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.
Auto Print Logs
On
O
Enable automatic printing of fax logs.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Logs Display
Remote Station Name
Dialed Number
Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name or
fax name returned.
Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.
Enable Job Log
On
O
Enable access to the Fax Job log.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 205
Use To
Enable Call Log
On
O
Enable access to the Fax Call log.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify the bin for the printed fax logs.
Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Speaker Settings
Use To
Speaker Mode
Always O
On until Connected
Always On
Specify the mode of the speaker.
Note: On until Connected is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until
the fax connection is made.
Speaker Volume
High
Low
Set the speaker volume to high or low.
Note: High is the factory default setting.
Ringer Volume
O
On
Enable or disable the ringer volume.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Answer On
Use To
All Rings
Single Ring Only
Double Ring Only
Triple Ring Only
Single or Double Rings Only
Single or Triple Rings Only
Double or Triple Rings Only
Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls.
Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) menu
Fax Mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission.
Use To
To Format Enter specific fax information.
Reply Address
Subject
Message
SMTP Setup Specify SMTP setup information.
Understanding the printer menus 206
Use To
Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server port information.
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Image Format
PDF (.pdf)
XPS (.xps)
TIFF (.tif)
Specify the image format.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Content Type
Te xt
Graphics
Te xt/ Ph ot o
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the content was originally produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Fax Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi
Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 207
Use To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Dicult Media Letter
Dicult Media A5
Dicult
Media Legal
Dicult Media A4
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
O
Provide a choice between single‑page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files.
For a multiple-page scan‑to‑fax job, either one TIFF file is created containing all
the pages, or multiple TIFF
files
are created with one
file
for each page of the
scan job.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable Analog Receive
O
On
Enable receiving of analog faxes.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Settings menu
Use To
E‑mail Server Setup
Subject
Message
File Name
Specify e‑mail server information.
Understanding the printer menus 208
Use To
E‑mail Server Setup
Send me a copy
Never appears
On by default
O by default
Always On
Send a copy of the e-mail to the sender.
Note: Never appears is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Server Setup
Max E‑mail size
0–65535 KB
Specify the maximum e-mail size.
Note: E-mails bigger than the specified maximum size are not sent.
E‑mail Server Setup
Size Error Message
Send a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size limit.
E‑mail Server Setup
Limit destinations
Specify a domain name, such as a company domain name, and then limit e‑mail
destinations only to that domain name.
Notes:
• E-mail can be sent only to the specified domain.
• The limit is one domain.
E‑mail Server Setup
Web Link Setup
Server
Login
Password
Path
File Name
Web Link
Define the e‑mail server Web link settings.
Note: The characters * : ? < > | are invalid entries for a path name.
Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
RTF (.rtf)
TXT (.txt)
Specify the file format.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 209
Use To
PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
A–1b
PDF Compression
Normal
High
Secure PDF
O
On
Searchable PDF
O
On
Configure the PDF settings.
Notes:
• 1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
• Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression. This menu
item appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
• O is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF.
Secure PDF requires you to enter your password twice.
Content Type
Te xt
Graphics
Te xt/ Ph ot o
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
O
On
Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch.
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 210
Use To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Dicult Media Letter
Dicult Media A5
Dicult
Media Legal
Dicult Media A4
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
O
Long Edge
Short Edge
Specify the orientation of the original document loaded in the ADF for two‑sided
scanning.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the
image.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo De f au lt
5–90
Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of
the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
E‑mail images sent as
Attachment
Web Link
Specify how the images are sent.
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 211
Use To
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
O
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files.
For a multiple-page scan‑to‑e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing
all the pages, or multiple TIFF
files
are created with one
file
for each page of
the job.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
TIFF Compression
LZW
JPEG
Specify the format used in compressing TIFF files.
Note: LZW is the factory default setting.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Enable printing of a transmission log after each e-mail job.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for printing e-mail logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify the bin for e‑mail logs.
Notes:
• Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
• Bin [x] appears only when at least one optional bin is installed.
E‑mail Bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images
when Color is set to O.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
On
O
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is
installed.
Scan Preview
On
O
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is
installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
O
Save e-mail addresses as shortcuts.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to
O,
the Save As Shortcut button does not appear on the e-
mail Destination screen.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 212
Use To
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Ye llow - B l ue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color
threshold.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
O
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
O
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
ADF Multi‑feed Sensor
On
O
Detect when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at once.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
O
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperatur e
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the
default while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Use cc:/bcc:
O
On
Enable the use of the cc: and bcc: fields.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 213
FTP Settings menu
Use To
Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
RTF (.rtf)
TXT (.txt)
Specify the file format.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
PDF Compression
Normal
High
Secure PDF
O
On
Searchable PDF
O
On
Configure the PDF settings.
Notes:
• 1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
• Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression.
• O is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF.
Secure PDF requires you to enter your password twice.
Content Type
Te xt
Graphics
Te xt/ Ph ot o
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
O
On
Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 214
Use To
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Dicult Media Letter
Dicult Media A5
Dicult Media Legal
Dicult Media A4
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
O
Long Edge
Short Edge
Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for
two‑sided scanning.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 215
Use To
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to the file size and quality of
the image.
Notes:
• Best for content is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of the text in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo De f au lt
5–90
Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to the file size and quality of
the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
image.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
O
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files.
For a multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing
all the pages, or multiple TIFF
files
are created with one
file
for each page of
the job.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
TIFF Compression
LZW
JPEG
Specify the format used in compressing TIFF files.
Note: LZW is the factory default setting.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specify whether to print the transmission log.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify the bin for FTP logs.
Notes:
• Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
• Bin [x] only appears when at least one optional bin is installed.
FTP bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images
when Color is set to O.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
File Name Enter a base file name.
Understanding the printer menus 216
Use To
Custom Job Scanning
On
O
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Scan Preview
On
O
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
O
Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Ye llow - B l ue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color
threshold.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
O
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
O
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 217
Use To
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
ADF Multi–feed Sensor
O
On
Detect when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at once.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
O
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Specify the amount of sharpness of the scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperatur e
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the
default while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Flash Drive menu
Scan Settings
Use To
Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
RTF (.rtf)
TXT (.txt)
Specify the file format.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
A–1b
PDF Compression
Normal
High
Secure PDF
O
On
Searchable PDF
O
On
Configure the PDF settings.
Notes:
• 1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
• Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression. This menu
item appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
• O is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF.
Secure PDF requires you to enter your password twice.
Understanding the printer menus 218
Use To
Content Type
Te xt
Graphics
Te xt/ Ph ot o
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
On
O
Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 219
Use To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Dicult Media Letter
Dicult Media A5
Dicult
Media Legal
Dicult Media A4
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
O
Long Edge
Short Edge
Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for two-
sided scanning.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo De f au lt
5–90
Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
O
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files.
For a multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing
all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Scan Bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images
when Color is set to O.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 220
Use To
File Name Enter a base file name.
Custom Job Scanning
On
O
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is
installed.
Scan Preview
On
O
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is
installed.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Ye llow - B l ue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color
threshold.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
O
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
O
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 221
Use To
Scan edge to edge
O
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperatur e
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the
default while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Print Settings
Use To
Copies
1–999
Specify a default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: (1,2,3) (1,2,3) is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Enable two-sided printing for incoming print jobs.
Note: 1 sided is the factory default setting.
Staple
O
On
Specify whether prints are stapled.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a staple
finisher
is installed.
Hole Punch
O
On
Specify whether prints have punched holes.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a supported staple, hole punch finisher is
installed.
Hole Punch Mode
2 holes
3 holes
4 holes
Specify the number of holes to be made on the prints.
Notes:
• 3 holes is the U.S. factory default setting. 4 holes is the international factory default
setting.
• This menu item appears only when a supported staple, hole punch
finisher
is
installed.
Understanding the printer menus 222
Use To
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Define binding for two‑sided pages in relation to page orientation.
Notes:
• Long Edge is the factory default setting. It assumes binding along the long edge of
the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver
O
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Specify that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a paper.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• The number selected is the number of page images that print per side.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border on each page image.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images.
Notes:
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in
portrait or landscape orientation.
Separator Sheets
O
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate
is set to (1,2,3) (1,2,3). If Collate is set to (1,1,1) (2,2,2), then a blank page is inserted
between each set of printed pages.
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This
setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a
document.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 223
Use To
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
OCR Settings menu
Note: This menu appears only if you have purchased and installed the AccuRead OCR solution.
Use To
Auto Rotate
On
O
Automatically rotate scanned documents for proper orientation.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Despeckle
O
On
Remove specks from a scanned image.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Inverse Detection
On
O
Recognize and make the white text on a black background editable.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Auto Contrast Enhance
O
On
Automatically adjust the contrast to improve OCR quality.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Recognized Languages
English
French
German
Spanish
Italian
Portugues
Danish
Dutch
Norwegian
Swedish
Finnish
Hungarian
Polish
Set the language or languages that the OCR can recognize.
For each language, select from the following options:
O
On
Note: The language is enabled by default. If it is set to a value that is not in
the list of recognized languages, English is enabled by default.
Understanding the printer menus 224
Print Settings
Setup menu
Use To
Printer Language
PCL Emulation
PS Emulation
Set the default printer language.
Notes:
• PS Emulation is the factory default printer language.
• Setting a printer language as the default does not
prevent a software program from sending print jobs that
use another printer language.
Job Waiting
On
O
Specify that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they
require unavailable printer options or custom settings. They
are stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print
normally. When the missing information or options are
obtained, the stored jobs print.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is
installed. This requirement ensures that stored jobs are
not deleted if the printer loses power.
Print Area
Normal
Fit to Page
Whole Page
Set the logical and physical printable area.
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to
print data in the non‑printable area
defined
by the
Normal setting, the printer clips the image at the
boundary.
• Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the
non‑printable area defined by the Normal setting. Whole
Page only aects pages printed using a PCL 5e
interpreter. This has no eect on pages printed using the
PCL XL or PostScript interpreter.
Download Target
RAM
Flash
Disk
Set the storage location for downloads.
Notes:
• RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in
the RAM is temporary.
• Storing downloads in the flash memory or in a printer
hard disk places them in permanent storage. Downloads
remain in the flash memory or in the printer hard disk
even when the printer is turned
o.
• This menu appears only when a formatted, working flash
drive or printer hard disk is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 225
Use To
Resource Save
On
O
Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such
as fonts and macros stored in the RAM, when the printer
receives a job that requires more memory than is available.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting. This sets the printer to
retain the downloads only until memory is needed.
Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs.
• On retains the downloads during language changes and
printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory, then
Memory Full [38] appears, and downloads are not
deleted.
Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Newest First
Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are
printed when Print All is selected.
Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting. Print jobs
always appear in alphabetical order on the printer control
panel.
Finishing menu
Use To
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specify whether two‑sided (duplex) printing is set as the default for all print jobs.
Notes:
• “1 sided” is the factory default setting.
• You can set two‑sided printing from the printer software.
For Windows users:
Click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or
Setup.
For Macintosh users:
Choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and
pop‑up menus.
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Define the way duplexed pages are bound and printed.
Notes:
• Long Edge is the factory default setting. This assumes binding along the
long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge
for portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies
1–999
Specify the default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 226
Use To
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: “(1,2,3) (1,2,3)” is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheets
O
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3).” If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a
blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after
all page 1's and after all page 2's.
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job.
This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting
blank pages in a document.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Notes:
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for Multipurpose
Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
Paper Saver
O
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Print multiple‑page images on one side of a paper.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• The number selected is the number of page images that will print per
side.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images when using Paper Saver.
Notes:
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they
are in portrait or landscape orientation.
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between
portrait and landscape.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border when using Paper Saver.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 227
Use To
Staple Job
O
On
Specify whether printed output is stapled.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a supported staple finisher is
installed.
Run Stapler Test Print a report that confirms that the staple finisher is functioning properly.
Note: This menu item appears only when a supported staple
finisher
is
installed.
Hole Punch
On
O
Specify whether holes will be created on printed outputs for the purpose of
collecting the sheets in a binder or folder.
Notes:
•
O
is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a supported staple, hole punch
finisher is installed.
Hole Punch Mode
2 holes
3 holes
4 holes
Specify the number of holes to be created on printed outputs for the purpose
of collecting the sheets in a binder or folder.
Notes:
• “3 holes” is the U.S. factory default setting. “4 holes” is the international
factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a supported staple, hole punch
finisher is installed.
Oset Pages
None
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Oset pages at certain instances.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies osets each copy of a print job if Collate is set to “(1,2,3)
(1,2,3).” If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then each set of printed pages are
oset, such as all page 1's and all page 2's.
• Between Jobs sets the same oset position for the entire print job
regardless of the number of copies printed.
• This menu item appears only when a supported staple finisher is
installed.
Quality menu
Use To
Print Resolution
300 dpi
600 dpi
1200 dpi
1200 Image Q
2400 Image Q
Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch.
Note: 600 dpi is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 228
Use To
Pixel Boost
O
Fonts
Horizontally
Vertically
Both directions
Enable more pixels to print in clusters for clarity, in order to enhance images
horizontally or vertically, or to enhance fonts.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Toner Darkness
1–10
Lighten or darken the printed output.
Notes:
• 8 is the factory default setting.
• Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
Enhance Fine Lines
On
O
Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps,
electrical circuit diagrams, and flow charts.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• To set this option using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer
IP address in the Web browser address field.
Gray Correction
Auto
O
Automatically adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Brightness
‑6 to 6
Adjust the printed output either by lightening or darkening it. You can conserve
toner by lightening the output.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast
0–5
Adjust the contrast of printed objects.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting menu
Note: This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Use To
Job Accounting Log
O
On
Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting Utilities Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive.
Accounting Log Frequency
Daily
Weekly
Monthly
Determine and set how often a log file is created.
Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 229
Use To
Log Action at End of Frequency
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold
expires.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Log Near Full Level
O
1–99
Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Log
Action at Near Full.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Log Action at Near Full
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Determine and set how the printer responds when the hard disk is nearly full.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting.
• The value defined in Log Near Full Level determines when this action is
triggered.
Log Action at Full
None
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the
maximum limit (100MB).
Note: None is the factory default setting.
URL to Post Logs Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs.
E‑mail Address to Send Logs Specify the e‑mail address to which the printer sends job accounting logs.
Log File Prefix Specify the prefix you want for the log file name.
Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the
default log file prefix.
Understanding the printer menus 230
Utilities menu
Use To
Remove Held Jobs
Confidential
Held
Not Restored
All
Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk.
Notes:
• Selecting a setting aects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.
Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are
not
aected.
• Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from
the printer hard disk or memory.
Format Flash
Ye s
No
Format the flash memory.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn
o
the printer while the
flash
memory is being formatted.
Notes:
• Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
• No cancels the format request.
• Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory
card in the printer.
• The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
• This menu item appears only when a non‑defective flash memory card is
installed.
Delete Downloads on Disk
Delete Now
Do Not Delete
Delete downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buered
jobs, and parked jobs.
Notes:
• Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the
display to return to the originating screen after the deletion.
• Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu
for touch‑screen printer models. When selected in non‑touch‑screen
printer models, Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating
screen after the deletion.
Activate Hex Trace Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem.
Notes:
• When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation, and control codes are not executed.
• To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn o or reset the printer.
Coverage Estimator
O
On
Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The
estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 231
XPS menu
Use To
Print Error Pages
O
On
Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
PDF menu
Use To
Scale to Fit
Ye s
No
Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Annotations
Do Not Print
Print
Print annotations in a PDF.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
PostScript menu
Use To
Print PS Error
On
O
Print a page containing the PostScript error.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Lock PS Startup Mode
On
O
Disable the SysStart file.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Font Priority
Resident
Flash/Disk
Establish the font search order.
Notes:
• Resident is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is available only when a formatted
flash
memory
option card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly.
• Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.
• Job Buer Size must not be set to 100%.
Understanding the printer menus 232
PCL Emul menu
Use To
Font Source
Resident
Disk
Download
Flash
All
Specify the set of fonts used in the Font Name menu.
Notes:
• Resident is the factory default setting. It shows the factory default set
of fonts downloaded in the RAM.
• Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option. Make
sure the flash option is properly formatted and is not read/write‑, or
password‑protected.
• Download shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.
• All shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name
Courier 10
Identify a specific font and where it is stored.
Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting.
Symbol Set
10U PC‑8
12U PC‑850
Specify the symbol set for each font name.
Notes:
• 10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the
international factory default setting.
• A symbol set is a set of alphabetical and numeric characters,
punctuation, and special symbols. Symbol sets support the dierent
languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific
text. Only the supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation Settings
Point Size
1.00–1008.00
Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.
Notes:
• 12 is the factory default setting.
• Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point
equals approximately 0.014 of an inch. This can be increased or
decreased in 0.25‑point increments.
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
0.08–100.00
Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Notes:
• 10 is the factory default setting.
• Pitch refers to the number of
fixed
‑space characters per inch (cpi).
This can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
• For non‑scalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the
display but cannot be changed.
PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of text and graphics on a page.
Notes:
• Portrait is the factory default setting. It prints text and graphics
parallel to the short edge of the page.
• Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the
page.
Understanding the printer menus 233
Use To
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
Specify the number of lines that print on each page.
Notes:
• 60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default
setting.
• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on
the Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the
paper size and orientation before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm
Set the printer to print on A4‑size paper.
Notes:
• 198 mm is the factory default setting.
• The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing
of eighty 10‑pitch characters.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto CR after LF
On
O
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR)
after a line feed (LF) control command.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto LF after CR
On
O
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
carriage return (CR) control command.
Note:
O
is the factory default setting.
Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
O
None
0–199
Assign Tray [x]
O
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
O
None
0–199
Assign Manual Envelope
O
None
0–199
Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
dierent source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• None ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This selection
appears only when it is selected by the PCL 5e interpreter.
• 0–199 allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Understanding the printer menus 234
Use To
Tray Renumber
View Factory Defaults
MPF Default = 8
T1 Default = 1
T2 Default = 4
T3 Default = 5
T4 Default = 20
T5 Default = 21
Env Default = 6
MPaper Default = 2
MEnv Default = 3
Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray, drawer, or feeder.
Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Ye s
No
Return all tray, drawer, and feeder assignments to the factory default
settings.
HTML menu
Use To
Font Name
Albertus MT
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Lubalin Graph
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Tay
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
NewSansMTCS
NewSansMTCT
New SansMTJA
NewSansMTKO
Set the default font for HTML documents.
Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do
not specify a font.
Understanding the printer menus 235
Use To
Font Size
1–255 pt
Set the default font size for HTML documents.
Notes:
• 12 pt is the factory default setting.
• Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
Scale
1–400%
Scale the default font for HTML documents.
Notes:
• 100% is the factory default setting.
• Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Set the page orientation for HTML documents.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Margin Size
8–255 mm
Set the page margin for HTML documents.
Notes:
• 19 mm is the factory default setting.
• Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Backgrounds
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Image menu
Use To
Auto Fit
On
O
Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.
Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation
settings for some images.
Invert
On
O
Invert bitonal monochrome images.
Notes:
• O is the factory default setting.
• This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Scaling
Anchor Top Left
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width
Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.
Notes:
• Best Fit is the factory default setting.
• When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Understanding the printer menus 236
Use To
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape
Set the image orientation.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Help menu
Menu item Description
Print All Guides Prints all the guides
Copy Guide Provides information about making copies and configuring the settings
E‑mail Guide Provides information about sending e‑mails and configuring the settings
Fax Guide Provides information about sending faxes and configuring the settings
FTP Guide Provides information about scanning documents and configuring the settings
Print Defects Guide Provides a template for determining the cause of repeating print quality
defects, and lists settings that can be used to adjust print quality
Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information
Supplies Guide Provides information about ordering supplies
Understanding the printer menus 237
Saving money and the environment
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their
impact on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce
materials, and provide collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:
• The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This
chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.
Saving paper and toner
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can
significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such
as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
For more information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see
“Using
Eco‑Mode” on page 239.
Using recycled paper
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled oce paper produced
specifically for use in laser/LED printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your
printer, see
“Using recycled paper and other oce papers” on page 86.
Conserving supplies
Use both sides of the paper
If your printer model supports two‑sided printing, then you can control whether print appears on one or two
sides of the paper.
Notes:
• Two-sided printing is the default setting in the print driver.
• For a complete list of supported products and countries, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper
by setting multiple page printing (N‑Up) for the print job.
Saving money and the environment 238
Check your first draft for accuracy
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:
• Use the preview feature to see how the document looks like before you print it.
• Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.
Avoid paper jams
Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on
page 268.
Saving energy
Using Eco‑Mode
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode > select a setting
Use To
O Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode. O supports the
performance specifications of the printer.
Energy Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
• Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before
the first page is printed.
• The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper
• Enable the automatic two‑sided (duplex) feature.
• Turn
o
print log features.
3 Click Submit.
Reducing printer noise
Enable Quiet Mode to reduce printer noise.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Saving money and the environment 239
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting
Use To
On Reduce printer noise.
Notes:
• Print jobs are processed at a reduced speed.
• Printer engine motors do not start until a
document is ready to print. There will be a short
delay before the first page is printed.
O Use factory default settings.
Note: This setting supports the performance
specifications of the printer.
3 Click Submit.
Adjusting Sleep mode
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode
2 In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes the printer is idle before it enters Sleep mode.
3 Apply the changes.
Using Hibernate mode
Hibernate is an ultra‑low‑power operating mode.
Notes:
• Three days is the default amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
• Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job. A hard reset or a long
press of the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode.
• If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the Embedded Web Server is disabled.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings
2 From the “Press Sleep Button” or “Press and Hold Sleep Button” menu, select Hibernate, and then touch
Submit.
Saving money and the environment 240
Adjusting the brightness of the printer display
To save energy, or if you have trouble reading the display, adjust its brightness settings.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings.
3 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4 Click Submit.
Recycling
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more
information, see:
• The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products for recycling:
1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through
your local recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.
Recycling Lexmark packaging
Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are
transported in the most ecient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to
dispose of. These
eciencies
result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource
savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your
area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist
in your area.
Saving money and the environment 241
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle
the box.
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making
it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One
hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for
recycling. Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled.
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or
cartridge and use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:
1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Saving money and the environment 242
Securing the printer
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.
Type of memory Description
Volatile memory Your printer uses standard random access memory
(RAM) to temporarily buer user data during simple print
jobs.
Non-volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used
to store the operating system, device settings, network
information, bookmark settings, and embedded
solutions.
Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer
hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality.
This lets the device retain buered user data from
complex print jobs, as well as form data, and font data.
Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:
• The printer is being decommissioned.
• The printer hard disk is being replaced.
• The printer is being moved to a dierent department or location.
• The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
• The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
• The printer is being sold to another organization.
Disposing of a printer hard disk
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data
stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your
premises.
• Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic
field
that erases stored data
• Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
• Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely
erased is to physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.
Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the
buered data, simply turn o the printer.
Securing the printer 243
Erasing non‑volatile memory
Erase individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions by following
these steps:
1 Turn o the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress
bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the
Configuration
menu appears. When the printer is
fully turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display, instead of the standard home screen icons.
3 Touc h Wipe All Settings.
The printer restarts several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, and passwords from the printer
memory.
4 Touc h Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Erasing printer hard disk memory
Notes:
• Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
• Configuring Erase Temporary Data Files in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential
material left by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.
Using the printer control panel
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress
bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the
Configuration
menu appears. When the printer is
fully turned on, the touch screen displays a list of functions.
3 Touc h Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:
• Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
• Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by
a verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely
erasing data from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.
4 Touc h Ye s to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.
• Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
5 Touc h Back > Exit Config Menu.
Securing the printer 244
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard
disk is installed.
3 From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.
Notes:
• Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress
bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is
fully turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3 Touc h Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
4 Touc h Ye s to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
• Do not turn
o
the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the
printer will return to the Enable/Disable screen.
5 Touc h Back > Exit Config Menu.
Securing the printer 245
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Finding the printer security information
In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data
stored in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, go to the
Lexmark security Web page or see the Embedded Web Server—Security: Administrator’s Guide at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Securing the printer 246
Maintaining the printer
Warning—Potential Damage: Failure to maintain optimum printer performance, or to replace parts and
supplies, may cause damage to your printer.
Cleaning printer parts
Cleaning the printer
Note: You may need to perform this task after every few months.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the
printer warranty.
1 Make sure that the printer is turned o and unplugged from the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the
printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer
before proceeding.
2 Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.
3 Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
4 Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water, and use it to wipe the outside of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents to prevent damage to the
exterior of the printer.
5 Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before sending a new print job.
Maintaining the printer 247
Cleaning the scanner glass
1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2 Open the scanner cover.
3 Open the bottom ADF door.
4 Wipe the ADF scanner glass under the ADF door.
5 Close the bottom ADF door.
Maintaining the printer 248
6 Wipe the areas shown, and then let them dry.
4 1
3 2
1 Scanner glass pad
2 Scanner glass
3 ADF glass
4 ADF glass pad
7 Close the scanner cover.
Emptying the hole punch box
1 Pull out the hole punch box.
Maintaining the printer 249
2 Empty the container.
3 Insert the emptied hole punch box back into the
finisher
until it clicks into place.
Checking the status of parts and supplies
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Maintaining the printer 250
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Device Status > More Details.
Estimated number of remaining pages
The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer. Its accuracy
may vary significantly and is dependent on many factors, such as actual document content, print quality settings,
and other printer settings.
The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption
is dierent from the historical printing consumption. Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing
or replacing supplies based on the estimate. Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer, initial
estimates assume future supplies consumption based on the International Organization for Standardization*
test methods and page content.
* Average continuous black declared cartridge yield in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.
Ordering supplies
To order parts and supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark
authorized supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, go to the Lexmark Web site at
www.lexmark.com or contact the place where you purchased the printer.
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.
Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party
supplies or parts may aect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components. Use
of third-party supplies or parts can aect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies
or parts is not covered by the warranty. All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and
parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage
beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.
Ordering toner cartridges
Notes:
• The estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19752 standard.
• Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively aect actual yield.
Item Return Program cartridge
United States and Canada
Toner Cartridge 621
High Yield Toner Cartridge 621H
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 621X
For more information on countries located in each region, visit
www.lexmark.com/regions.
Maintaining the printer 251
Item Return Program cartridge
European Union (EU), European Economic Area (EEA), and Switzerland
Toner Cartridge 622
High Yield Toner Cartridge 622H
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 622X
Asia Pacific region (includes Australia and New Zealand)
Toner Cartridge 623
High Yield Toner Cartridge 623H
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 623X
Latin America (includes Puerto Rico and Mexico)
Toner Cartridge 624
High Yield Toner Cartridge 624H
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 624X
Africa, Middle East, Central Eastern Europe (non‑EU), and Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS)
Toner Cartridge 625
High Yield Toner Cartridge 625H
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 625X
For more information on countries located in each region, visit
www.lexmark.com/regions.
Item Regular cartridge
Worldwide
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 620XA
Ordering a maintenance kit
To identify the supported fuser type, view the label on the fuser. Do either of the following:
• Remove the toner cartridge and the imaging unit. The two-digit fuser type code (such as 00 or 01) can be
seen on the front of the fuser.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
• Pull down the printer rear door. The two-digit fuser type code (such as 00 or 01) can be seen on the rear of
the fuser.
Notes:
• Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit.
• The separator roller, fuser, pick roller assembly, and transfer roller are all included in the maintenance kit
and can be individually ordered and replaced if necessary.
• For more information on replacing the parts included in the maintenance kit, see the instruction sheet
that came with each part.
Maintaining the printer 252
Lexmark Return Program fuser maintenance kit type
Type Part number
MX810 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 00 40X8420
MX810 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 01 40X8421
MX810 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 02 40X8422
MX810 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 03 40X8423
MX810 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 04 40X8424
Lexmark regular fuser maintenance kit type
Type Part number
MX810 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 05 40X8425
MX810 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 06 40X8426
MX810 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 07 40X8427
MX810 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 08 40X8428
MX810 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 09 40X8429
Lexmark roller kit
Part number
MX810 Series roller kit 40X7706
Lexmark ADF maintenance kit
Part number
MX810 Series ADF maintenance kit 40X8431
Ordering an imaging unit
Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may cause imaging unit parts to fail prior to
exhaustion of toner.
For more information on replacing the imaging unit, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Part name Lexmark Return Program Regular
Imaging unit 520Z 520ZA
Ordering staple cartridges
Part name Part number
Staple cartridges 25A0013
Maintaining the printer 253
Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing
until you are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:
• Direct sunlight
• Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
• High humidity above 80%
• Salty air
• Corrosive gases
• Heavy dust
Maintaining the printer 254
Replacing supplies
Replacing the toner cartridge
1 Lift the front cover, and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
1
2
Maintaining the printer 255
2 Pull the cartridge out of the printer using the handle.
3 Unpack the new toner cartridge, then remove the packing material, and then shake the cartridge to
redistribute the toner.
4 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the
side rails inside the printer.
Note: Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in.
Maintaining the printer 256
Warning—Potential Damage: When replacing a toner cartridge, do not leave the imaging unit exposed to
direct light for an extended period of time. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
5 Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover.
2
1
Maintaining the printer 257
Replacing the imaging unit
1 Lift the front cover, and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
1
2
Maintaining the printer 258
2 Pull out the toner cartridge from the printer using the handle.
3 Lift the green handle, and then pull out the imaging unit from the printer.
1
2
Maintaining the printer 259
4 Unpack the new imaging unit, and then shake it.
5 Remove all packing material from the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may
aect
the print
quality of future print jobs.
6 Insert the imaging unit into the printer by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the imaging unit with the
arrows on the side rails inside the printer.
Maintaining the printer 260
7 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the
side rails inside the printer.
8 Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover.
2
1
Maintaining the printer 261
Replacing a staple cartridge
1 Open the stapler door.
1 2
2 Pull down the latch of the staple cartridge holder, and then pull the holder out of the finisher.
3 Squeeze both sides of the empty staple case with your fingers, and then remove the staple case from the
cartridge.
1
1
2
Maintaining the printer 262
4 Insert the front side of the new staple case into the staple cartridge, and then push the rear side into the
cartridge.
1
2
5 Push the staple cartridge into the finisher until it clicks into place.
6 Close the stapler door.
Moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
Before moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal
injury or printer damage:
• Turn the printer o using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
Maintaining the printer 263
• If an optional tray is installed, then remove it from the printer. To remove the optional tray, slide the latch on
the right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place.
• Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
• Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
• Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the
printer warranty.
Moving the printer to another location
The printer and its hardware options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:
• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.
• Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the
hardware options.
• Keep the printer in an upright position.
• Avoid severe jarring movements.
Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.
Maintaining the printer 264
Managing the printer
Finding advanced networking and administrator
information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced
system support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded
Web Server — Security: Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Checking the virtual display
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.
Setting up e‑mail alerts
Configure the printer to send you e‑mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to
be changed or added, or when there is a paper jam.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings.
3 From the Other Settings menu, click E‑mail Alert Setup.
4 Select the items you want to be notified on, and then type the e‑mail addresses.
5 Click Submit.
Note: For information on setting up the e‑mail server, contact your system support person.
Managing the printer 265
Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status
of the printer, network, and supplies.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web
Server
You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, very low, or reach their
end‑of‑life by setting the selectable alerts.
Notes:
• Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge, imaging unit, and maintenance kit.
• All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low, low, and very low supply conditions. Not all selectable
alerts can be set for the end‑of‑life supply condition. E‑mail selectable alert is available for all supply
conditions.
• The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for
some supply conditions.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications.
3 From the drop‑down menu for each supply, select one of the following notification options:
Notification Description
O The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.
E‑mail Only The printer generates an e‑mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of
the supply appears on the menus page and status page.
Warning The printer displays the warning message and generates an e‑mail about the status
of the supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.
Continuable Stop
1
The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached, and the user
needs to press a button to continue printing.
Non Continuable Stop
1,2
The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached. The supply
must be replaced to continue printing.
Managing the printer 266
Notification Description
1
The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.
2
The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.
4 Click Submit.
Restoring factory default settings
If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before
restoring the factory default settings. For more information, see
“Printing a menu settings page” on page 57.
If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the
Wipe All Settings option. For more information, see
“Erasing non‑volatile memory” on page 244.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory
default settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port
menu settings. All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a
printer hard disk are not aected.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now > Submit
Managing the printer 267
Clearing jams
Avoiding jams
Load paper properly
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper
• Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
• Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it before printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
• Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Clearing jams 268
• Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.
• Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing
tightly against the paper or envelopes.
• Push the tray
firmly
into the printer after loading paper.
• If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher, then make sure the holes on the long
edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray. For more information, see the “Loading paper and specialty
media” section of the User’s Guide.
Clearing jams 269
Allow the paper to enter the optional mailbox bins properly
• Make sure to adjust the bin extender so that the paper size indicators match the size of the paper used.
Notes:
– If the bin extender is shorter than the size of the paper you are printing on, then the paper causes a
jam in the mailbox bin. For example, if you are printing on a legal-size paper and the bin extender is
set to letter-size, then a jam occurs.
– If the bin extender is longer than the size of the paper you are printing on, then the edges become
uneven and the paper is not stacked properly. For example, if you are printing on a letter-size paper
and the bin extender is set to legal-size, then the paper does not stack properly.
Clearing jams 270
• If paper needs to be returned to the mailbox bin, then insert the paper under the bin arm, and then push
the paper all the way back.
Note: If the paper is not under the bin arm, then a jam occurs due to an overfilled bin.
Use recommended paper
• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
• Flex, fan, and straighten paper or specialty media before loading it.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.
• Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
• Store paper per manufacturer recommendations.
Identifying jam locations
Notes:
• When Jam Assist is set to On, the printer
flushes
blank pages or pages with partial prints after a jammed
page is cleared. Check your printed output for blank pages.
Clearing jams 271
• When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages.
Area name
1 Staple access door
2 Duplex unit
3 Trays
4 Staple finisher rear door
5 Lower rear door
6 Upper rear door
7 Mailbox
8 Multipurpose feeder
9 Front cover
10 Standard bin
11 Automatic document feeder (ADF)
Clearing jams 272
Paper jam in the front cover
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
1 Open the front cover and the multipurpose feeder.
1
2
Clearing jams 273
2 Remove the toner cartridge.
3 Remove the imaging unit.
1
2
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
4 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 274
1
2
5 Insert the imaging unit.
Note: Use the arrows on the side of the printer as guides.
6 Insert the toner cartridge.
Note: Use the arrows on the side of the printer as guides.
Clearing jams 275
7 Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover.
2
1
Paper jam in the rear door
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
Clearing jams 276
1 Open the rear door.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 277
3 Close the rear door.
Clearing jams 278
4 Push the back of the standard tray.
1 2
5 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 279
2
1
6 Insert the standard tray.
Paper jam in the standard bin
Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 280
Paper jam in the duplex unit
1 Remove the tray.
1
2
3
2 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 281
1
2
3 Insert the tray.
Paper jam in trays
1 Pull out the tray.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 282
3 Insert the tray.
Paper jam in the multipurpose feeder
1 Remove paper from the multipurpose feeder.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 283
3 Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.
4 Reload paper, and then adjust the paper guide.
Paper jam in the mailbox
1 Open the rear mailbox door, and then remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 284
1
2
2 Close the door.
3 If the jam is in the mailbox bin, then remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 285
Paper jam in the automatic document feeder
1 Remove all original documents from the ADF tray.
2 Open the ADF cover.
Clearing jams 286
3 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
4 Close the ADF cover.
5 Open the scanner cover.
6 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
1
2
7 Close the scanner cover.
Clearing jams 287
Paper jam in the staple finisher
1 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 288
2 Open the staple finisher rear door, and then remove the jammed paper.
1
2
3 Close the door.
Staple jam in the finisher
1 Open the staple access door.
1 2
Clearing jams 289
2 Remove the staple cartridge holder.
3 Open the staple guard, and then remove the loose staples.
4 Close the staple guard.
Clearing jams 290
5 Press the staples against the metal bracket.
Note: If the staples are at the rear of the cartridge, then shake the cartridge downward to bring the
staples near the metal bracket.
6 Insert the staple cartridge holder.
7 Close the staple access door.
Clearing jams 291
Troubleshooting
Understanding the printer messages
Cartridge low [88.xy]
You may need to order a replacement toner cartridge. If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control
panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch [41.xy]
Use only a supported toner cartridge and imaging unit.
Note: For a list of supported supplies, go to www.lexmark.com.
Cartridge nearly low [88.xy]
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy]
You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies”
section of the User’s Guide.
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu
on the control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Touc h Use current [paper source] to use the available paper size and type in the tray.
• Touc h Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, specify the size and type of paper in the
Paper menu on the control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Touc h Use current [paper source] to use the available size and type of paper in the current tray or
feeder.
• Touc h Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 292
Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, specify the size and type of paper in the
Paper menu on the control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Touc h Use current [paper source] to use the available size and type of paper in the current tray or
feeder.
• Touc h Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, specify the paper size and type in the
Paper menu on the control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Touc h Use current [paper source] to use the available paper size and type in the tray.
• Touc h Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.
Check tray [x] connection
Try one or more of the following:
• Turn o the printer, and then turn it back on.
If the error occurs a second time, then:
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the indicated tray.
4 Reattach the tray.
5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6 Turn the printer back on.
If the error occurs again, then:
1 Turn o the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the tray.
4 Contact customer support.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and resume the job.
Close door or insert cartridge
The toner cartridge is missing or not installed properly. Insert the cartridge, and then close all doors and
covers.
Troubleshooting 293
Close finisher rear door
Close the rear door of the finisher.
Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job [2yy.xx]
Try one or more of the following:
• Touc h Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last
successful scan job.
• Touc h Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner glass immediately after the last
successful scan job.
• Touc h Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further
for copying, faxing, or e-mailing.
• Touc h Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
Close rear door
Close the rear door of the printer.
Close top access cover
Close the printer top access cover to clear the message.
Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
• Cancel current print job.
• Install additional printer memory.
Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57]
Held jobs are invalidated because of the following possible changes in the printer:
• The printer firmware has been updated.
• The tray for the print job has been removed.
• The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port.
• The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a dierent
printer model.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Troubleshooting 294
Defective flash detected [51]
Try one or more of the following:
• Replace the defective flash memory card.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.
Disk full [62]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
• Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.
Disk full, scan job canceled
Try one or more of the following:
• Touc h Continue to clear the message and continue scanning.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
• Install a hard disk with higher capacity.
Disk must be formatted for use in this device
From the printer control panel, touch Format disk to format the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk.
Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touc h Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
• Install a hard disk with higher capacity.
Empty the hole punch box
Try one or more of the following:
• Empty the hole punch box.
• Select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the print job.
Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
An unsupported USB device is inserted. Remove the USB device, and then insert a supported one.
Troubleshooting 295
Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.
An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.
Fax memory full
1 From the control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and cancel the fax job.
2 Do the following:
• Reduce the fax resolution.
• Reduce the number of pages.
3 Send the fax job.
Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Turn o the printer, and then turn it back on. If the message appears again, then contact your system
support person.
Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, then contact your system support
person.
Fax Station Name not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try either of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact
your system support person.
Fax Station Number not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact
your system support person.
Imaging unit low [84.xy]
You may need to order a replacement imaging unit. If necessary, select Continue on the printer control
panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Troubleshooting 296
Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy]
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy]
You may need to replace the imaging unit very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies”
section of the User’s Guide.
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Incompatible output bin [x] [59]
Try one or more of the following:
• Remove the indicated bin.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without
using the indicated bin.
Incompatible tray [x] [59]
Try one or more of the following:
• Remove the indicated tray.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without
using the indicated tray.
Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and then specify the paper size and type in the
Paper menu on the printer control panel.
• Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified in Print Properties or the Print dialog settings.
• Check if the paper size is correctly set. For example, if MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, then make
sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed.
• Check the length and width guides and make sure the paper is loaded properly in the tray.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and print using a
dierent
tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Insert hole punch box
Insert the hole punch box into the finisher, and then touch Continue to clear the message.
Insert staple cartridge
Try one or more of the following:
• Insert a staple cartridge.
• Touc h Continue to clear the message and print without using the staple finisher.
Troubleshooting 297
Insert Tray [x]
Insert the indicated tray into the printer.
Install bin [x]
Try one or more of the following:
• Install the specified bin:
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Install the specified bin.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
• Cancel the print job.
• Reset active bin
Install Tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:
• Install the specified tray:
1 Turn o the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Install the specified tray.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
• Cancel the print job.
• Reset the active bin.
Insucient memory to collate job [37]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin
collating the rest of the print job.
• Cancel the current print job.
Insucient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]
Install additional printer memory or touch Continue to disable Resource Save, clear the message, and
continue printing.
Insucient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Troubleshooting 298
Insucient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory.
Load [paper source] with [custom string] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, and then touch Finished loading paper
on the control panel.
• Touc h Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, and then touch Finished loading paper
on the control panel.
• Touc h Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.
Load [paper source] with [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, and then touch Finished loading paper on the
control panel.
• Touc h Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, and then touch Finished
loading paper on the control panel.
• Touc h Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the current job.
Load multipurpose feeder with [custom string] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded
to clear the message and continue printing.
Troubleshooting 299
• From the control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Load multipurpose feeder with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• From the control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to
clear the message and continue printing.
• From the control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Load multipurpose feeder with [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size of paper.
• From the control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to
clear the message and continue printing.
• From the control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Load multipurpose feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• From the control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to
clear the message and continue printing.
• From the control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Load staples
Try one or more of the following:
• Replace or insert the staple cartridge in the finisher.
For instructions on inserting or replacing a staple cartridge in the finisher, touch More information on
the printer control panel.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• From the printer control panel, touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Maintenance kit low [80.xy]
You may need to order a maintenance kit. For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support, and then report the message.
If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Troubleshooting 300
Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy]
For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer
support, and then report the message.
If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [80.xy]
You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon. For more information, visit the Lexmark support
Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support, and then report the message.
If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Memory full [38]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Cancel job to clear the message.
• Install additional printer memory.
Memory full, cannot print faxes
From the control panel, do either of the following:
• Touc h Continue holding faxes without printing to clear the message.
• Touc h Attempt to print to restart the printer and continue printing.
Misfeed cleared, extra sheets in output bin [24y.xx]
Select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Note: To reduce misfeeds, make sure that media is fanned and loaded properly.
No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.
Connect the printer to an analog phone line.
Network [x] software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, visit the Lexmark
support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see User’s Guide [33.xy]
Note: The supply type can be toner cartridge or imaging unit.
Troubleshooting 301
The printer has detected a non‑Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer.
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-
party supplies or parts may aect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging
components. For more information, see
“Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies” on page 251.
All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts and may deliver unpredictable
results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may
damage your Lexmark printer or associated components.
Warning—Potential Damage: Use of third-party supplies or parts can aect warranty coverage.
Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty.
To accept any and all of these risks and to proceed with the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in your
printer, press and hold
and the # button on the control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds.
If you do not want to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from your printer and
install a genuine Lexmark supply or part.
Note: For a list of supported supplies, see the “Ordering supplies” section or go to
www.lexmark.com.
Not enough free space in
flash
memory for resources [52]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the flash memory.
• Install a flash memory card with larger capacity.
Note: Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in the
flash
memory are deleted.
Paper changes needed
Try one or more of the following:
• Touc h Use current supplies to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.
Parallel port [x] disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Enable the parallel port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Parallel [x] > Parallel Buer > Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
For more information, visit
http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support.
Troubleshooting 302
Reattach bin [x]
Try one or more of the following:
• Turn o the printer, and then turn it back on.
• Reattach the indicated bin.
1 Turn o the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the indicated bin.
4 Reattach the bin.
5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6 Turn the printer back on.
• Remove the indicated bin:
1 Turn o the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the indicated bin.
4 Contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the
specified bin.
Reattach bins [x] – [y]
Try one or more of the following:
• Turn o the printer, and then turn it back on.
• Reattach the indicated bins:
1 Turn o the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the indicated bins.
4 Reattach the bins.
5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6 Turn the printer back on.
• Remove the indicated bins:
1 Turn o the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the indicated bins.
4 Contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the
indicated bins.
Troubleshooting 303
Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:
• Check if the toner cartridge is missing. If missing, then install the toner cartridge.
For information on installing the toner cartridge, see the “Replacing supplies” section.
• If the toner cartridge is installed, then remove and reinstall the unresponsive toner cartridge.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then replace the toner cartridge. The
cartridge may be defective or a non‑genuine Lexmark supply. For more information, see
“Using
genuine Lexmark parts and supplies” on page 251.
Remove defective disk [61]
Remove and replace the defective printer hard disk.
Remove packaging material, [area name]
Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location.
Remove paper from all bins
Remove the paper from all of the bins. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.
Remove paper from bin [x]
Remove the paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes
printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.
Remove paper from [linked set bin name]
Remove paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically detects paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.
Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the paper stack from the standard bin.
Replace all originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touc h Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touc h Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last
successful scan job.
Troubleshooting 304
• Touc h Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful
scan job.
• Touc h Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
• Touc h Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated pages remain [88.xy]
Replace the toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s
Guide or visit
www.lexmark.com.
Replace cartridge, printer region mismatch [42.xy]
Install a toner cartridge that matches the region number of the printer. x indicates the value of the printer
region. y indicates the value of the cartridge region. x and y can have the following values:
Printer and toner cartridge regions
Region number Region
0Global
1 United States, Canada
2 European Economic Area (EEA), Switzerland
3 Asia Pacific, Australia, New Zealand
4Latin America
5 Africa, Middle East, rest of Europe
9 Invalid
Notes:
• The x and y values represent .xy in the code that appears on the printer control panel.
• The x and y values must match for printing to continue.
Replace defective imaging unit [31.xy]
Replace the defective imaging unit to clear the message. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that came with the supply.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the
User’s Guide or visit
www.lexmark.com.
Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy]
Replace the imaging unit to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
Troubleshooting 305
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the
User’s Guide or visit
www.lexmark.com.
Replace jammed originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touc h Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touc h Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last
successful scan job.
• Touc h Scan from
flatbed
to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful
scan job.
• Touc h Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
• Touc h Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
Replace last scanned page and jammed originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touc h Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touc h Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last
successful scan job.
• Touc h Scan from
flatbed
to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful
scan job.
• Touc h Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
• Touc h Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
Replace maintenance kit, recommended life exceeded [80.xy]
The printer is scheduled for maintenance. For more information, go to http://support.lexmark.com or
contact your service representative.
Replace maintenance kit to resume printing [80.xy]
The printer is scheduled for maintenance. For more information, go to http://support.lexmark.com or
contact your service representative.
Replace missing cartridge [31.xy]
Install the missing cartridge to clear the message. For more information, see “Replacing the toner cartridge”
on page 255.
Replace missing fuser [80.xx]
1 Install the missing fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement
part.
2 From the control panel, touch Supply replaced to clear the message.
Troubleshooting 306
Replace missing imaging unit [31.xy]
Install the missing imaging unit. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Replace roller kit [81.xx]
Try one or more of the following:
• Replace the roller kit. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the part.
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Replace separator pad
Try one or more of the following:
• Replace the separator pad. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
• From the printer control panel, touch Ignore to clear the message.
Replace unsupported cartridge [32.xy]
Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing.
For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
This error can also be caused by installing a genuine Lexmark cartridge, such as a high yield cartridge, that
is not intended to be used in this product.
The following error codes indicate that a non‑genuine Lexmark toner cartridge is installed:
32.13
32.16
32.19
32.22
32.25
32.28
32.31
32.34
32.37
For more information, see
“Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies” on page 251.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section or go to
www.lexmark.com.
Replace unsupported imaging unit [32.xy]
Remove the imaging unit, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For
more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
This error can also be caused by installing a genuine Lexmark imaging unit, such as a MICR unit, that is not
intended to be used in this product.
Troubleshooting 307
The following error codes indicate that a non‑genuine Lexmark imaging unit is installed:
32.14
32.17
32.20
32.23
32.26
32.29
32.32
32.35
32.38
For more information, see
“Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies” on page 251.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section or go to
www.lexmark.com.
Replace wiper
Try one or more of the following:
• Replace the fuser wiper in the printer.
• Touc h Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Restore held jobs?
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk.
• From the printer control panel, touch Do not restore if you do not want to restore any of the print jobs.
Scan document too long
The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages. Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel
the scan job.
Scanner automatic feeder cover open
Close the ADF cover.
Scanner disabled by admin [840.01]
Print without the scanner, or contact your system support person.
Troubleshooting 308
Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists.
[840.02]
Try one or more of the following:
• Touc h Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system
support person.
• Touc h Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job.
Note: This attempts to enable the scanner.
Scanner jam access cover open
Close the bottom ADF access cover to clear the message.
Scanner jam, open and close automatic feeder top cover [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the ADF cover.
Scanner jam, remove all originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.
Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.
Scanner maintenance required soon, use ADF Kit [80]
Contact customer support, and then report the message. The printer is scheduled for maintenance.
Serial port [x] disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the
specified
serial port.
• Make sure Serial Buer is not set to Disabled.
• From the printer control panel, set Serial Buer to Auto in the Serial [x] menu.
SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Troubleshooting 309
Some held jobs were not restored
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to delete the indicated job.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible.
Standard network software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn o the printer, and then turn it back on.
• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, visit the Lexmark
support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support, and then report the
message.
Standard USB port disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Enable the USB port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > USB
Buer
> Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
Supply needed to complete job
Do either of the following:
• Install the missing supply to complete the job.
• Cancel the current job.
The device is operating in Safe Mode. Some print options may be disabled
or provide unexpected results.
Touc h Continue to clear the message.
Too many bins attached [58]
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra bins.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
Troubleshooting 310
Too many disks installed [58]
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra printer hard disks.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
Too many flash options installed [58]
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra
flash
memory.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
Too many trays attached [58]
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra trays.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
Tray [x] paper size unsupported
Replace with a supported paper size.
Unformatted flash detected [53]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
• Format the flash memory.
Note: If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and needs to be
replaced.
Unsupported disk
Remove the unsupported printer hard disk, and then insert a supported one.
Troubleshooting 311
Unsupported option in slot [x] [55]
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer controller board, and then replace it with a
supported card.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
USB port [x] disabled [56]
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Notes:
• The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
• Make sure the USB
Buer
menu is not set to Disabled.
Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Solving printer problems
• “Basic printer problems” on page 312
• “Hardware and internal option problems” on page 315
• “Paper feed problems” on page 318
Basic printer problems
The printer is not responding
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Step 2
Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode?
Press the Sleep
button to wake the
printer from Sleep
mode or Hibernate
mode.
Go to step 3.
Troubleshooting 312
Action Yes No
Step 3
Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and
the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 4. Plug one end of the
power cord into the
printer and the other
to a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Step 4
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet.
Does other electrical equipment work?
Unplug the other
electrical equipment,
and then turn on the
printer. If the printer
does not work, then
reconnect the other
electrical equipment.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are
inserted in the correct ports.
Are the cables inserted in the correct ports?
Go to step 6. Make sure to match
the following:
• The USB symbol
on the cable with
the USB symbol
on the printer
• The appropriate
Ethernet cable
with the Ethernet
port
Step 6
Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned o by a switch or
breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned o by a switch or breaker?
Turn on the switch or
reset the breaker.
Go to step 7.
Step 7
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors,
uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
power supplies, or extension cords?
Connect the printer
power cord directly
to a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Go to step 8.
Step 8
Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the
printer and the other to the computer, print server, option, or other
network device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the
computer, print server, option, or other network device?
Go to step 9. Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print
server, option, or
other network
device.
Troubleshooting 313
Action Yes No
Step 9
Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any
packing material.
Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material
removed?
Go to step 10. Turn o the printer,
remove all packing
materials, then
reinstall the
hardware options,
and then turn on the
printer.
Step 10
Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer
driver.
Are the port settings correct?
Go to step 11. Use correct printer
driver settings.
Step 11
Check the installed printer driver.
Is the correct printer driver installed?
Go to step 12. Install the correct
printer driver.
Step 12
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
Is the printer working?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Printer display is blank
Action Yes No
Step 1
Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel.
Does Ready appear on the printer display?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display?
The problem is
solved.
Turn o the printer,
and then contact
customer support.
Troubleshooting 314
Hardware and internal option problems
Cannot detect internal option
Action Yes No
Step 1
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
on the printer.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller
board.
a Turn o the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the
power cord from the electrical outlet.
b Make sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate
connector in the controller board.
c Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly
grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board?
Go to step 3. Connect the internal
option to the
controller board.
Step 3
Print a menu settings page, and then check to see if the internal
option is listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?
Go to step 4. Reinstall the internal
option.
Step 4
a Check if the internal option is selected.
It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the
printer driver to make it available for print jobs. For more
information, see
“Adding available options in the print driver”
on page 52.
b Resend the print job.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 315
Internal print server does not operate correctly
Action Yes No
Step 1
Reinstall the internal print server.
a Remove, and then install the internal print server. For more
information, see
“Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on
page 34.
b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the internal print
server is listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the internal print server listed in the Installed Features list?
Go to step 2. Check if the internal
print server is
supported by the
printer.
Note: An internal
print server from
another printer may
not work with this
printer.
Step 2
Check the cable and the internal print server connection.
Use the correct cable, and then check if it is securely connected
to the internal print server.
Does the internal print server operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed.
a Install the ISP. For more information, see “Installing an Internal
Solutions Port” on page 34.
b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the ISP is listed
in the Installed Features list.
Is the ISP listed in the Installed Features list?
Go to step 2. Check if you have a
supported ISP.
Note: An ISP from
another printer may
not work on this
printer.
Step 2
Check the cable and the ISP connection.
a Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely
connected to the ISP.
b Check if the ISP solution interface cable is securely connected
into the receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The ISP solution interface cable and the receptacle on
the controller board are color‑coded.
Does the Internal Solutions Port operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 316
Tray problems
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
• Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are
aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.
• If you are printing on custom‑size paper, then make sure
that the paper guides rest against the edges of the paper.
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill
indicator.
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
b Check if the tray closes properly.
Is the tray working?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
a Turn o the printer, then wait about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
b Resend the print job.
Is the tray working?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer.
Print a menu settings page, and then check if the tray is listed
in the Installed Features list.
Is the tray listed in the menu settings page?
Go to step 4. Reinstall the tray. For
more information,
see the setup
documentation that
came with the tray.
Step 4
Check if the tray is available in the printer driver.
Note: If necessary, manually add the tray in the printer driver to
make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Adding available options in the print driver” on page 52.
Is the tray available in the printer driver?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 317
USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the USB or parallel interface card is installed.
a Install the USB or parallel interface card. For more information,
see
“Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on page 34.
b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the USB or parallel
interface card is listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the USB or parallel interface card listed in the Installed Features
list?
Go to step 2. Check if you have a
supported USB or
parallel interface
card.
Note: A USB or
parallel interface
card from another
printer may not work
on this printer.
Step 2
Check the cable and the USB or parallel interface card connection.
Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely
connected to the USB or parallel interface card.
Does the USB or parallel interface card operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Paper feed problems
Jammed pages are not reprinted
Action Yes No
Turn on Jam Recovery.
a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery
b From the Jam Recovery menu, touch the arrows to scroll to On
or Auto.
c Tou ch Submit.
Do pages reprint after a jam?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 318
Paper frequently jams
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are
aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.
• Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of
the paper.
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill
indicator.
• Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and
type.
b Insert the tray properly.
If jam recovery is enabled, then the print jobs will reprint
automatically.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
a Review the tips on avoiding jams. For more information, see
“Avoiding jams” on page 268.
b Follow the recommendations, and then resend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
Action Yes No
Check the entire paper path for jammed paper.
a Remove any jammed paper.
b From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the
message.
Does the paper jam message remain?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 319
Solving print problems
Printing problems
Confidential and other held documents do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1
a From the control panel, check if the documents appear in the
Held Jobs list.
Note: If the documents are not listed, then print the
documents using the Print and Hold options.
b Print the documents.
Are the documents printed?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
• Delete the print job, and then send it again.
• For PDF files, generate a new file, and then print the
documents.
Are the documents printed?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading
the multiple job titles as duplicates.
For Windows users
a Open the Printing Preferences dialog.
b From the Print and Hold section, select Keep duplicate
documents.
c Enter a PIN.
d Resend the print job.
For Macintosh users
a Save and name each job dierently.
b Send the job individually.
Are the documents printed?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
a Delete some held jobs to free up printer memory.
b Resend the print job.
Are the documents printed?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
Troubleshooting 320
Action Yes No
Step 5
a Add printer memory.
b Resend the print job.
Are the documents printed?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Envelope seals when printing
Action Yes No
a Use envelopes that have been stored in a dry environment.
Note: Printing on envelopes with high moisture content can
seal the flaps.
b Resend the print job.
Does the envelope seal when printing?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Error message about reading the flash drive appears
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB port.
Note: The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear
USB port.
Is the flash drive inserted into the front USB port?
Go to step 2. Insert the flash drive
into the front USB
port.
Step 2
Check if the indicator light on the printer control panel is blinking
green.
Note: A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy.
Is the indicator light blinking green?
Wait until the printer
is ready, then view
the held jobs list, and
then print the
documents.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
a Check for an error message on the display.
b Clear the message.
Does the error message still appear?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Check if the flash drive is supported.
For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives,
see
“Supported
flash
drives and
file
types” on page 97.
Does the error message still appear?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 321
Action Yes No
Step 5
Check if the USB port is disabled by the system support person.
Does the error message still appear?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Incorrect characters print
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode.
Note: If Ready Hex appears on the printer display, then turn o
the printer, and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace
mode.
Is the printer in Hex Trace mode?
Deactivate Hex
Trace mode.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
a From the printer control panel, select Standard Network or
Network [x], and then set SmartSwitch to On.
b Resend the print job.
Do incorrect characters print?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
a From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper
size and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, open Printing
Preferences or the Print dialog, and then specify the paper type.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Troubleshooting 322
Action Yes No
Step 4
a Check if the trays are not linked.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Large jobs do not collate
Action Yes No
Step 1
a From the Finishing menu on the printer control panel, set
Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
a From the printer software, set Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).
Note: Setting Collate to (1,1,1) (2,2,2) in the software overrides
the setting in the Finishing menu.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number
and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the
number of pages in the job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Multiple‑language PDF files do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if the print options for the PDF output are set to embed
all fonts.
For more information, see the documentation that came with
Adobe Acrobat.
b Generate a new PDF file, and then resend the print job.
Do the
files
print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 323
Action Yes No
Step 2
a Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
b Click File > Print > Advanced > Print As Image > OK > OK.
Do the files print?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Printing slows down
Notes:
• When printing using narrow paper, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the
fuser.
• The printer speed may be reduced when printing for long periods of time, or printing at elevated
temperatures.
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Make sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the
fuser type.
Note: Use a 110-volt fuser for printing on letter-size paper and
a 220-volt fuser for printing on A4‑size paper.
b Resend the print job.
Does the print speed increase?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
a Replace the fuser. For more information on installing the fuser,
see the instruction sheet that came with the part.
b Resend the print job.
Does the print speed increase?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Print jobs do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1
a From the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog
and check if you have selected the correct printer.
Note: If the printer is not the default printer, then you must
select the printer for each document that you want to print.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 324
Action Yes No
Step 2
a Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready
appears on the printer display.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
If an error message appears on the printer display, then clear the
message.
Note: The printer continues to print after clearing the message.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
a Check if the ports (USB, serial, or Ethernet) are working and if
the cables are securely connected to the computer and the
printer.
Note: For more information, see the setup documentation
that came with the printer.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
a Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then
turn the printer back on.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 6.
Step 6
a Remove, and then reinstall the printer software. For more
information, see
“Installing the printer software” on page 51.
Note: The printer software is available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 325
Print job takes longer than expected
Action Yes No
Step 1
Change the environmental settings of the printer.
a From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings
b Select Eco‑Mode or Quiet Mode, and then select O.
Note: Disabling Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode may increase the
consumption of energy or supplies, or both.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Reduce the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity
of images, and the number of pages in the print job, and then
resend the job
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
a Remove held jobs stored in the printer memory.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
a Disable the Page Protect feature.
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect
> O
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
a Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server
are secure. For more information, see the setup documentation
that came with the printer.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 6.
Step 6
Install additional printer memory, and then resend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 326
Tray linking does not work
Notes:
• The trays can detect paper length.
• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size. You must set the size from the
Paper Size/Type menu.
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Open the trays, and then check if they contain paper of the
same size and type.
• Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for
the size of the paper loaded in each tray.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are
aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
a From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be
linked.
Note: The paper size and type must match for trays to be
linked.
b Resend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Unexpected page breaks occur
Action Yes No
Increase the printing timeout.
a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts
b Increase the Print Timeout setting, and then touch Submit.
c Resend the print job.
Did the
file
print correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Check the original
file for manual page
breaks.
Troubleshooting 327
Print quality problems
Characters have jagged or uneven edges
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Print a font sample list to check if the fonts you are using are
supported by the printer.
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2 Tou ch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
b Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that
you want to use. For more information, contact your system
support person.
c Resend the print job.
Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven
edges?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that
you want to use on your computer. For more information,
contact your system support person.
b Resend the print job.
Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven
edges?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Clipped pages or images
Leading edge
Trailing edge
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Troubleshooting 328
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the paper loaded.
b Resend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the
Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper size and type match the paper loaded in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of
the following:
• Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded
in the tray.
• Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper size
specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size
from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge.
2 Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Compressed images appear on prints
Note: Printing on letter-size paper using a 220-volt fuser compresses images.
Troubleshooting 329
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Make sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the
fuser type.
Note: Use a 110-volt fuser for printing on letter-size paper and
a 220-volt fuser for printing on A4‑size paper.
b Resend the print job.
Do compressed images still appear?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
a Replace the fuser. For more information on installing the fuser,
see the instruction sheet that came with the part.
b Resend the print job.
Do compressed images still appear?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Gray background on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
a From the Quality Menu on the printer control panel, decrease
the toner darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
b Resend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Reinstall the imaging unit and the toner cartridge.
a Remove the toner cartridge.
b Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure
to light can cause print quality problems.
c Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
d Resend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Troubleshooting 330
Action Yes No
Step 3
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Horizontal voids appear on prints
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
b Resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of
paper.
b Resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 331
Incorrect margins on prints
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the paper size loaded.
b Resend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size in the Paper menu
to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of
the following:
• Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded
in the tray.
• Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper size
specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size
from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 332
Paper curl
Action Yes No
Step 1
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the size of the paper loaded.
Are the width and length guides positioned correctly?
Go to step 2. Adjust the width and
length guides.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the
paper in the tray?
Go to step 3. Specify the paper
type and weight from
the tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
a Remove the paper from the tray, and then turn it over.
b Resend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Printer is printing blank pages
Troubleshooting 333
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if there is packing material left on the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2 Check if the packing material is properly removed from the
imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Printer is printing solid black pages
Troubleshooting 334
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Print irregularities
) )
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the
Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the printer settings match the type and weight of the paper
loaded in the tray?
Go to step 3. Specify the paper
size and type from
the tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 335
Action Yes No
Step 4
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the printer
control panel, set the
paper texture in the
Paper menu to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 6. The problem is
solved.
Step 6
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Contact
customer
support at
http://support.lexm
ark.com or your
service
representative.
The problem is
solved.
Print is too dark
Action Yes No
Step 1
a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, reduce the
toner darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 336
Action Yes No
Step 2
a From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture and
weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of
the following:
• Specify the paper
type, texture, and
weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
• Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper type,
texture and
weight specified
in the tray
settings.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type,
texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print
dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the printer
control panel,
change the texture
settings in the Paper
Texture menu to
match the paper you
are printing on.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 6. The problem is
solved.
Step 6
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 337
Print is too light
Action Yes No
Step 1
a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, increase
the toner darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture, and
weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 3. Change the paper
type, texture, and
weight to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type,
texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print
dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the printer
control panel,
change the texture
settings in the Paper
Texture menu to
match the paper you
are printing on.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 6. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 338
Action Yes No
Step 6
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 7. The problem is
solved.
Step 7
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Repeating defects appear on prints
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Replace the imaging unit if the distance between the defects is
equal to any of the following:
• 47.8 mm (1.88 in.)
• 96.8 mm (3.81 in.)
• 28.5 mm (1.12 in.)
b Resend the print job.
Do repeating defects still appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Replace the fuser if the distance between the defects is equal
to either of the following:
• 94.25 mm (3.71 in.)
• 95.2 mm (3.75 in.)
b Resend the print job.
Do repeating defects still appear on prints?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 339
Shadow images appear on prints
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray.
Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray?
Go to step 2. Load paper with the
correct paper type
and weight in the
tray.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 3. Change the paper
loaded in the tray to
match the paper type
and weight specified
in the tray settings.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Skewed print
) )
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Troubleshooting 340
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the size of the paper loaded.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still skewed?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Check if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the
tray.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still skewed?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Depending on your operating system, specify the tray or feeder
from Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the
paper in the tray?
Go to step 3. Change the paper
type and weight to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Step 3
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 341
Action Yes No
Step 4
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type,
texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print
dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 342
Action Yes No
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper texture, type, and
weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper texture, type, and weight match the paper in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of
the following:
• Specify the paper
texture, type, and
weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
• Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper
texture, type, and
weight specified
in the tray
settings.
Step 3
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Contact
customer
support at
http://support.lexm
ark.com or your
service
representative.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 343
Toner fog or background shading appears on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Did the toner fog or background shading disappear from the
prints?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Did the toner fog or background shading disappear from the
prints?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Toner rubs o
Leading edge
Trailing edge
ABC
DEF
Troubleshooting 344
Action Yes No
Step 1
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the paper
type, texture, and weight.
Do the paper type, texture, and weight match the paper loaded in
the tray?
Go to step 2. Specify the paper
type, texture, and
weight from the tray
settings to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.
Step 2
Resend the print job.
Does the toner still rub o?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Toner specks appear on prints
Action Yes No
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do toner specks appear on prints?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Transparency print quality is poor
Action Yes No
Step 1
From the printer control panel, set the paper type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency?
Go to step 2. Set the paper type to
Transparency.
Step 2
a Check if you are using a recommended type of transparency.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print quality still poor?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Uneven print density
Troubleshooting 345
Action Yes No
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print density uneven?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Vertical voids appear on prints
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight
in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
Check if you are using a recommended type of paper.
a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of
paper.
b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 346
Action Yes No
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Solving copy problems
• “Copier does not respond” on page 347
• “Partial document or photo copies” on page 347
• “Poor copy quality” on page 348
• “Scanner unit does not close” on page 350
Copier does not respond
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Does an error or status message appear?
Clear the error or
status message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 3. Connect the power
cord to the printer
and a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Step 3
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
it back on.
Did Performing Self Test and Ready appear?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Partial document or photo copies
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the
scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Go to step 2. Place the document
or photo facedown
on the scanner glass
in the upper left
corner.
Troubleshooting 347
Action Yes No
Step 2
Check if the paper size setting matches the size of the paper
loaded in the tray.
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the
Paper Size setting.
Does the paper size setting match the size of the paper loaded in
the tray.
Go to step 3. Change the paper
size setting to match
the paper loaded in
the tray, or load the
tray with paper that
matches the paper
size setting.
Step 3
a Specify the paper size. Depending on your operating system,
specify the paper size in Printing Preferences or the Print
dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do copies print properly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Poor copy quality
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Does an error or status message appear?
Clear the error or
status message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check the quality of the original document.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Go to step 3. Increase the scan
resolution setting for
a higher‑quality
output.
Step 3
If dark marks appear on prints, then clean the scanner glass and
the ADF glass using a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Go to step 4. See
“Cleaning the
scanner glass” on
page 248.
Step 4
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.
a From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco‑Mode settings.
b From the Copy menu, adjust the Darkness setting.
c If the print remains faded, then replace the toner cartridge.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Go to step 5. See
“Print quality
problems” on
page 328.
Troubleshooting 348
Action Yes No
Step 5
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the
scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Go to step 6. Place the document
or photo facedown
on the scanner glass
in the upper left
corner.
Step 6
Check the copy settings.
From the Copy screen, check if the Content Type and Content
Source settings are correct for the document being scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
Go to step 7. Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.
Step 7
Check for patterns on prints.
a From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > select
a lower setting
Note: Make sure no scaling is being selected.
b Resend the copy job.
Do patterns appear on prints?
Go to step 8. The problem is
solved.
Step 8
Check for missing or faded text on prints.
a From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging
b Adjust the settings:
• Sharpness—Increase the current setting.
• Contrast—Increase the current setting.
c Resend the copy job.
Do prints have missing or faded text?
Go to step 9. The problem is
solved.
Step 9
Check for washed‑out or overexposed output.
a From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging
b Adjust the settings of the following:
• Background Removal—Reduce the current setting.
• Shadow Detail—Reduce the current setting.
c Resend the copy job.
Do pages show washed‑out or overexposed prints?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 349
Scanner unit does not close
Action Yes No
Check if there are no obstructions between the scanner unit and
the printer.
a Lift the scanner unit.
b Remove any obstruction that keeps the scanner unit open.
c Lower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close properly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Solving fax problems
• “Caller ID is not shown” on page 350
• “Cannot send or receive a fax” on page 351
• “Can receive but not send faxes” on page 353
• “Can send but not receive faxes” on page 354
• “Fax and e-mail functions are not set up” on page 354
Caller ID is not shown
Action Yes No
Contact your telephone company to check if your telephone line
is subscribed to the caller ID service.
Notes:
• If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, then you
may have to change the default setting. There are two
settings available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2).
• The availability of these settings in the Fax menu depends
on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID
patterns.
• Contact your telephone company to determine which
pattern or switch setting to use.
Does the caller ID appear?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 350
Cannot send or receive a fax
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Is there an error or status message on the display?
Clear the error or
status message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 3. Connect the power
cord to the printer
and a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Step 3
Check the power.
Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready
appears on the display.
Is the printer turned on, and does Ready appear on the display?
Go to step 4. Turn on the printer,
and then wait until
Ready appears on
the display.
Step 4
Check the printer connections.
If applicable, check if the cable connections for the following
equipment are secure:
• Telephone
• Handset
• Answering machine
Are the cable connections secure?
Go to step 5. Securely connect
the cables.
Step 5
a Check the telephone wall jack.
1 Plug the telephone cable into the wall jack.
2 Listen for a dial tone.
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a dierent telephone
cable into the wall jack.
4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug the telephone
cable into a
dierent
wall jack.
5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall
jack.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 6.
Troubleshooting 351
Action Yes No
Step 6
Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or the
correct digital connector.
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be
connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can
be used.
• If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect
the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port)
on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to
request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN provider.
• If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router
that will support analog use. For more information, contact
your DSL provider.
• If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure
you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX. If
none exists, then consider installing an analog telephone
line for the fax machine.
Is the printer connected to an analog phone service or the correct
digital connector?
Go to step 7. Connect the printer
to an analog phone
service or the correct
digital connector.
Step 7
Check for a dial tone.
Did you hear a dial tone?
Go to step 8.
• Try calling the fax
number to make
sure that it is
working properly.
• If the telephone
line is being used
by another
device, then wait
until the other
device is finished
before sending a
fax.
• If you are using
the On Hook Dial
feature, then turn
up the volume to
check if you hear
a dial tone.
Step 8
Temporarily disconnect other equipment (such as answering
machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters)
between the printer and the telephone line, and then try sending
or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 9.
Troubleshooting 352
Action Yes No
Step 9
a Temporarily disable call waiting. Contact your telephone
company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily
disabling call waiting.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 10.
Step 10
a Temporarily disable voice mail service. For more information,
contact your telephone company.
Note: If you want to use both voice mail and the printer, then
consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 11.
Step 11
Scan the original document one page at a time.
a Dial the fax number.
b Scan the document one page at a time.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Can receive but not send faxes
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the printer is in Fax mode.
From the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax
mode, and then send the fax.
Note: The Multi Send application does not support the XPS
output type. To use XPS, use the regular faxing method.
Can you send faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Load the original document properly.
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the
ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left
corner.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies,
photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the
ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Can you send faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Troubleshooting 353
Action Yes No
Step 3
Set up the shortcut number properly.
• Check if the shortcut number has been set for the telephone
number that you want to dial.
• Dial the telephone number manually.
Can you send faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Can send but not receive faxes
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the tray or feeder.
If empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check the ring count delay settings.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in
the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen.
The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it
to load the Web page correctly.
b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
c In the “Rings to Answer” field, enter the number of times you
want the phone to ring before the printer answers.
d Click Submit.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Replace the toner cartridge. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Fax and e-mail functions are not set up
Notes:
• Before you troubleshoot, check if the fax cables are connected.
• The indicator light is blinking red until you set up fax and e‑mail.
Troubleshooting 354
Action Yes No
a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Run initial setup > Ye s >
Submit
b Turn
o
the printer, and then turn it back on.
The “Select your language” screen appears on the printer
display.
c Select a language, and then touch .
d Select a country or region, and then touch Next.
e Select a time zone, and then touch Next.
f Select Fax and E‑mail, and then touch Next.
Are fax and e‑mail functions set up?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Solving scanner problems
• “Cannot scan from a computer” on page 355
• “Partial document or photo scans” on page 356
• “Poor scanned image quality” on page 356
• “Scan job was not successful” on page 357
• “Scanner unit does not close” on page 358
• “Scanning takes very long or freezes the computer” on page 358
• “The scanner does not respond” on page 359
Cannot scan from a computer
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer is turned on and that Ready appears on the
printer display before scanning a job.
Does Ready appear before scanning the job?
Go to step 3. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Clear the error
message.
Go to step 3.
Troubleshooting 355
Action Yes No
Step 3
Check the cable connections between the printer and the print
server to make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came
with the printer.
Are the cable connections between the printer and the print server
secure?
Contact
customer
support.
Tighten the cable
connections.
Partial document or photo scans
Action Yes No
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the
scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Contact
customer
support.
Load the document
or photo facedown
on the scanner glass
in the upper left
corner.
Poor scanned image quality
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error message appears on the display.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Clear the error
message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check the quality of the original document.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Go to step 3. Increase the scan
resolution settings
for a higher‑quality
output.
Step 3
Clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint‑free
cloth dampened with water.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Go to step 4. See
“Cleaning the
scanner glass” on
page 248.
Step 4
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the
scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Go to step 5. Place the document
or photo facedown
on the scanner glass
in the upper left
corner.
Troubleshooting 356
Action Yes No
Step 5
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.
• From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco‑Mode settings.
• From the Copy menu, adjust the Darkness setting.
• When the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Go to step 6. See
“Print quality
problems” on
page 328.
Step 6
Check the scan settings.
From the Scan screen, make sure the Content Type and
Content Source settings are correct for the document being
scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
Go to step 7. Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.
Step 7
Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher‑quality output.
Did the increased resolution produce a higher‑quality output?
Problem solved. Contact
customer
support.
Scan job was not successful
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the cable connections.
Make sure the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected to
the computer and the printer.
Are the cables securely connected?
Go to step 2. Connect the cables
properly.
Step 2
Check if the file name is already in use.
Is the file name already in use?
Change the file
name.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if the document or photo you want to scan is open in another
application or being used by another user.
Is the
file
you want to scan open by another application or user?
Close the file you are
scanning.
Go to step 4.
Troubleshooting 357
Action Yes No
Step 4
Check if either the Append time stamp or the Overwrite existing
file check box is selected in the destination configuration settings.
Is the Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box
selected in the destination
configuration
settings?
Contact
customer
support.
Select the Append
time stamp or
Overwrite existing
file check box in the
destination
configuration
settings.
Scanner unit does not close
Action Yes No
Check if there are obstructions in the scanner unit.
a Lift the scanner unit.
b Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
c Lower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Scanning takes very long or freezes the computer
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if other applications are interfering with the scan.
Close all applications that are not being used.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
Select a lower scan resolution.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 358
The scanner does not respond
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Step 2
Check if the printer cable is securely attached to the printer and
the computer, print server, option, or other network device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the
computer, print server, option, or other network device?
Go to step 3. Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print
server, option, or
other network
device.
Step 3
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 4. Connect the power
cord to the printer
and a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Step 4
Check if the electrical outlet is turned o by a switch or breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned o by a switch or breaker?
Turn on the switch or
reset the breaker.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors,
uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
power supplies, or extension cords?
Connect the printer
power cord directly
to a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Go to step 6.
Step 6
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet.
Are the other electrical equipment working?
Unplug the other
electrical equipment
and turn on the
printer. If the printer
does not work, then
reconnect the other
electrical equipment
and then go to step
6.
Go to step 7.
Step 7
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
Are the printer and scanner working?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 359
Solving home screen application problems
An application error has occurred
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the system log for relevant details.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in
the address field.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
• View the IP address on the printer home screen.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages, and
then locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
b Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > System tab >
Log.
c From the Filter menu, select an application status.
d From the Application menu, select an application, and then
click Submit.
Does an error message appear in the log?
Go to step 2. Contact customer
support.
Step 2
Resolve the error.
Is the application working now?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Embedded Web Server does not open
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Turn on the printer.
b Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
c Press Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 360
Action Yes No
Step 2
Make sure the printer IP address is correct.
a View the printer IP address:
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page,
and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
b Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address.
Note: Depending on the network settings, you may need to
type “https://” instead of “http://” before the printer IP
address to access the Embedded Web Server.
c Press Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if the network is working.
a Print a network setup page.
b Check the first section of the network setup page and confirm
that the status is Connected.
Note: If the status is Not Connected, then the connection
may be intermittent, or the network cable may be defective.
Contact your system support person for a solution, and then
print another network setup page.
c Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
d Press Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server are
secure.
a Connect the cables properly. For more information, see the
setup documentation that came with the printer.
b Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
c Press Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers.
Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain
Web sites including the Embedded Web Server.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is
solved.
Contact your system
support person.
Troubleshooting 361
Notices
Product information
Product name:
Lexmark MX810, MX811, MX812
Machine type:
7463
Model(s):
436, 636, 836
Edition notice
September 2022
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local
law: LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of
express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made
to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the
products or the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to
make these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is
not intended to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally
equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be
used instead. Evaluation and
verification
of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services,
except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, visit
http://support.lexmark.com.
For information on supplies and downloads, visit
www.lexmark.com.
© 2012 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT END USERS
The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is
defined
in 48
C.F.R. 2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are
used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R.
227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software
Documentation are licensed to the U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only
those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
Notices 363
Trademarks
Lexmark, the Lexmark logo, MarkNet, and MarkVision are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lexmark
International, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
Google Cloud Print is a trademark of Google Inc.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies
in the United States and other countries.
Mopria®, the Mopria® logo, and the Mopria® Alliance logo are registered trademarks and service marks of Mopria
Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s
designation of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer
is intended to be compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used
in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:
Albertus The Monotype Corporation plc
Antique Olive Monsieur Marcel OLIVE
Apple-Chancery Apple Computer, Inc.
Arial The Monotype Corporation plc
CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a
product of Agfa Corporation
Chicago Apple Computer, Inc.
Clarendon Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Eurostile Nebiolo
Geneva Apple Computer, Inc.
GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc
Helvetica Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation
ITC Mona Lisa International Typeface Corporation
ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation
Joanna The Monotype Corporation plc
Marigold Arthur Baker
Monaco Apple Computer, Inc.
New York Apple Computer, Inc.
Oxford Arthur Baker
Notices 364
Palatino Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Stempel Garamond Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Tay Agfa Corporation
Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc
Univers Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information
statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than
recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or
modifications
to this equipment. Unauthorized changes
or modifications could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing
device, use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach
or 1021294 for USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a
violation of FCC regulations.
Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO
9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing 55 (MX810, MX811); 56 (MX812)
Scanning 57
Copying 55 (MX810); 56 (MX811, MX812)
Ready 30 (MX810, MX812); 31 (MX811)
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Notices 365
Temperature information
Ambient operating temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Shipping temperature -40 to 43.3°C (-40 to 110°F)
Storage temperature and relative humidity 1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)
8 to 80% RH
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
The WEEE logo
signifies
specific
recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the
European Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at
www.lexmark.com for your
local sales oce phone number.
India E-Waste notice
This product complies with the India E-Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 2011, which prohibit use of
lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls, or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in
concentrations exceeding 0.1％ by weight and 0.01% by weight for cadmium, except for the exemption set in
Schedule II of the Rules.
Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local
authorities for disposal and recycling options.
Static sensitivity notice
This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching
the metal frame of the printer.
Notices 366
ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR
®
emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is
certified
to
comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped
by Lexmark.
Laser notice
The printer is
certified
in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Chapter I, Subchapter J for
Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is
certified
as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements
of IEC 60825-1: 2014.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser
that is nominally a 15‑milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 787–800 nanometers. The
laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I
level during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.
Laser advisory label
A laser notice label may be
axed
to this printer as shown:
DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.
PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.
Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.
NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.
FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner ernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.
GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.
DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.
VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.
GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und oener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην
ακτινοβολία laser.
VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.
PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.
FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.
NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.
ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.
Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.
PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.
FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.
危险 - 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射，请避免暴露在激光光束下。
危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。
危険 - カートリッジが
取り外され
、内部ロックが
無効になると
、見えないレーザー
光が放射されます
。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。
Notices 367
Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Mode Description Power consumption (Watts)
Printing The product is generating hard‑copy output from electronic inputs. 760 (MX810); 860 (MX811); 960
(MX812)
Copy The product is generating hard‑copy output from hard‑copy
original documents.
820 (MX810); 920 (MX811); 1020
(MX812)
Scan The product is scanning hard‑copy documents. 140
Ready The product is waiting for a print job. 120 (Ready 1); 70 (Ready 2)
Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode. 16
Hibernate The product is in a low‑level energy‑saving mode. 0.7
O The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but the power
switch is turned o.
0
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements.
Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See
www.lexmark.com for current values.
Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by
lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged
after this product is not used for a
specified
period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 20
By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 120 minutes.
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response
time of the product. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more
energy.
Hibernate Mode
This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in
Hibernate Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:
• Using the Hibernate Timeout
• Using the Schedule Power modes
• Using the Sleep/Hibernate button
Notices 368
Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions 3 days
The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be
modified
between one hour and one month.
O mode
If this product has an o mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product
power consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.
Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are
provided in power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends
in each mode in order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's
energy usage.
Applicability of Regulation (EU) 2019/2015 and (EU) 2019/2020
Per Commission Regulation (EU) 2019/2015 and (EU) 2019/2020, the light source contained within this product
or its component is intended to be used for Image Capture or Image Projection only, and is not intended for
use in other applications.
Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment
Standard ICES-003.
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux
équipements pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.
Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the installation
software CD.
Notices 369
Japanese VCCI notice
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2014/30/EU, 2014/35/EU,
and 2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, and
on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,
40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön
fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY. A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the
Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative or may be obtained at
www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/european-union-declaration-of-conformity.html.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and EN55032 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1.
Radio interference notice
Warning
This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 and EN55032 Class A limits and
immunity requirements of EN55024. This product is not intended to be used in residential/domestic
environments.
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case
the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment
This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal
equipment such as facsimile.
Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative
Council for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other
information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided
to your telephone company.
Notices 370
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply
with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and
modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is
also compliant. See your setup documentation for more information.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to
a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an
incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number
of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone
company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier
that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point
(for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company
will notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the
FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could
aect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in
order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International,
Inc. at
www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone
network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark
International, Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.
Connection to party line service is subject to state taris. Contact the state public utility commission, public
service commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of
this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm
equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to
customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide
problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which
this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified
by UL (Underwriter's Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized
safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local
lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other
electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a
margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time
it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the
telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number
provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance
transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.
Notices 371
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical
specifications.
The Ringer Equivalence Number
(REN) is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface.
The terminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that
the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the
equipment on the product labeling.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to
customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide
problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which
this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified
by UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized
safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local
lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.
Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence
number : numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant
être connectés à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés
n’est pas directement limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro
REN du modem est indiqué sur l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là
d’un problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un
parasurtenseur dans la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur
répondant à des caractéristiques nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL
(Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région ou pays. Ceci prévient tout
endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.
Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item
of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions
for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any
sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another
item of telepermitted equipment of a dierent make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible
with all of Telecom's network services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.
This equipment may not provide for the eective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same
line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom
customers.
Notices 372
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the
equipment associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following
limits for compliance to Telecom's specifications:
• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single
manual call initiation, and
• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt
and the beginning of the next call attempt.
• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to
dierent
numbers are spaced such that there
is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.
Japanese telecom notice
The installed optional modem is in compliance with Japanese Telecommunication Law and has been Certified
by JATE, with Certification Number A11-0160001.
Lexmark International, Inc.
LEX-M03-002
A11-0160001JP
Using this product in Switzerland
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 80D1877) to be installed on any line which
receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog
telephone lines in Switzerland.
Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un
filtre
de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark :
80D1877) devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce
filtre
doit être
utilisé pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.
Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark
Teilenummer 80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen
werden. Die Verwendung des Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz
Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind.
Notices 373
Uso del prodotto in Svizzera
Questo prodotto richiede un
filtro
toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 80D1877) da installare su tutte le linee
che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro poiché gli impulsi remoti sono presenti
su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera.
Modular component notice
Wireless‑equipped models contain the following modular component(s):
Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model LEX-M01-005; FCC ID:IYLLEXM01005; IC:2376A-M01005
Patent acknowledgment
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher
Suites for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with
SHA-256/382 and AES Galois Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Suite B
Profile
for Transport Layer Security
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to
Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in
the Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites
for TLS implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic
Curve Digital Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec
implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version
1 (IKEv1) implemented in the product or service.
Notices 374
STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,
LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER
PRINTERS
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the
country-specific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale,
from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”
Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for
repair or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the
product for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or
option with the product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to
that user for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this
statement to that user.
Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12
months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with
the printer shall end earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser
Units, Transfer/Transport Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is
available are substantially consumed when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance”
message for such item.
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to
deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark
designated location. You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the
Lexmark designated location.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of
the Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a
repair not included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal
obligations, restrictions, liens, and encumbrances.
Notices 375
As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the
latest version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized
products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized
use of genuine Lexmark products will not be impacted.
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable
storage media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area
contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer
covered by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.
Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of
prints produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS
OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND
SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW
ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL
APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES, AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT
TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.
Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance
or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover
actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the
product that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or
damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL
LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER
ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the
possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim.
Notices 376
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's
and its Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers
are intended beneficiaries of this limitation.
Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or
limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not
apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you
specific
legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
Notices 377
Index
Numerics
2100‑sheet tray
loading 68
550‑sheet tray
installing 46
A
accessing the Embedded Web
Server 20
Active NIC menu 166
adapter plug 130
adding hardware options
print driver 52
adding internal options
print driver 52
ADF
copying using 101
adjusting copy quality 106
adjusting printer display
brightness 241
adjusting Sleep mode 240
adjusting toner darkness 94
administrator settings
Embedded Web Server 265
advanced options
copy options 112
e‑mail options 119
fax options 142
FTP options 149
AirPrint
using 95
answering machine
setting up 121
AppleTalk menu 171
applications
home screen 22
understanding 21
attaching cables 49
available internal options 27
avoiding jams 88
avoiding paper jams 268
B
Bin Setup menu 163
blocking junk faxes 138
buttons, printer control panel 15
buttons, touch screen
using 18
C
canceling a print job
from the computer 100
from the printer control
panel 100
canceling an e-mail 117
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 360
Card Copy
setting up 23
card stock
loading 75
tips 83
Cartridge low [88.xy] 292
Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 292
Cartridge very low, [x] estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 292
Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch
[41.xy] 292
Change [paper source] to
[custom string] load
[orientation] 292
Change [paper source] to
[custom type name] load
[orientation] 292
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] load [orientation] 293
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] load
[orientation] 293
changing output
file
type
e‑mailing 116
changing port settings
internal solutions port 56
Check tray [x] connection 293
checking an unresponsive
printer 312
checking status of parts and
supplies 250
checking the status of parts and
supplies 250
checking the virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 265
checking virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 265
cleaning
exterior of the printer 247
scanner glass 248
cleaning the printer 247
Close door or insert
cartridge 293
Close finisher rear door 294
Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job
[2yy.xx] 294
Close rear door 294
Close top access cover 294
collate
copy options 111
collating copies 107
Complex page, some data may
not have printed [39] 294
compressed images appear on
prints 329
confidential
data
information on securing 246
confidential jobs
modifying print settings 99
confidential
print jobs 98
Confidential
Print menu 181
Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored [57] 294
configuration
information
wireless network 53
Configure MP menu 152
configuring
supply
notifications,
imaging
unit 266
supply notifications,
maintenance kit 266
supply
notifications,
toner
cartridge 266
configuring e‑mail settings 113
configuring
port settings 56
configuring
supply
notifications 266
connecting printer to distinctive
ring service 133
Index 378
connecting to a wireless network
using PIN (Personal
Identification Number)
method 54
using Push Button Configuration
method 54
using the Embedded Web
Server 55
using wireless setup wizard 54
conservation settings
brightness, adjusting 241
conserving supplies 238
Eco‑Mode 239
Hibernate mode 240
Quiet Mode 239
Sleep Mode 240
conserving supplies 238
contacting customer
support 362
content
e‑mail settings 117
content source
e‑mail settings 117
fax options 141
content type
e‑mail settings 117
fax options 141
control panel, printer 15
indicator light 15
Sleep button light 15
controller board
accessing 27
copies
copy options 111
copy job, canceling
using the ADF 110
using the scanner glass 110
copy options
advanced options 112
collate 111
copies 111
darkness 111
Save As Shortcut 112
sides (duplex) 111
copy quality
adjusting 106
copy screen
content source 111
content type 111
options 110, 111
Copy Settings menu 194
copy troubleshooting
copier does not respond 347
partial document or photo
copies 347
poor copy quality 348
poor scanned image
quality 356
scanner unit does not
close 350, 358
copying
adding an overlay message 109
adjusting quality 106
canceling a copy job 110
collating copies 107
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 103
custom job 108
dierent paper sizes 104
enlarging 106
inserting a header or footer 109
multiple pages on one
sheet 108
on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 105
on letterhead 103
on transparencies 102
photos 102
placing separator sheets
between copies 107
quick copy 101
reducing 106
selecting a tray 104
to a dierent size 104
using the ADF 101
using the scanner glass 102
copying dierent paper sizes 104
copying multiple pages on one
sheet 108
copying on both sides of the
paper (duplexing) 105
copying on transparencies 102
creating a fax destination
shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 137
creating an FTP shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 143
Custom Bin Names menu 162
Custom Names menu 161
custom paper type
assigning 82
custom paper type name
creating 81
Custom Scan Sizes menu 162
Custom Type [x]
changing name 81
Custom Types menu 161
customer support
contacting 362
D
darkness
copy options 111
e‑mail options 118
fax options 141
scan options 148
date and time, fax
setting 134
daylight saving time, setting 134
Default Source menu 152
Defective flash detected [51] 295
delayed send
fax options 141
device and network settings
information
erasing 244
dierent paper sizes,
copying 104
digital subscriber line (DSL)
fax setup 126
digital telephone service
fax setup 128
directory list
printing 100
Disk full 62 295
Disk full, scan job canceled 295
Disk must be formatted for use in
this device 295
disk wiping 244
display troubleshooting
printer display is blank 314
display, printer control panel 15
adjusting brightness 241
disposing of printer hard
disk 243
distinctive ring service, fax
connecting to 133
documents, printing
from a computer 94
from a mobile device 95
DSL filter 126
duplexing 105
Index 379
E
Eco‑Mode setting 239
Edit Security Setups menu 179
embedded solutions information
erasing 244
Embedded Web Server
accessing 20
adjusting brightness 241
administrator settings 265
checking the status of
parts 250
checking the status of
supplies 250
creating a fax destination
shortcut 137
creating an FTP shortcut 143
creating e‑mail shortcuts 114
initial fax setup 120
modifying confidential print
settings 99
networking settings 265
problem accessing 360
scanning to a computer
using 146
setting up e‑mail alerts 265
Embedded Web Server —
Security: Administrator's Guide
where to find 265
Embedded Web Server—
Security: Administrator’s Guide
where to find 246
emission notices 365, 369, 370
Empty the hole punch box 295
emptying the hole punch
box 249
encrypting the printer hard
disk 245
enlarging a copy 106
envelopes
loading 75
tips on using 83
environmental settings
conserving supplies 238
Eco‑Mode 239
Hibernate mode 240
printer display brightness,
adjusting 241
Quiet Mode 239
Sleep Mode 240
Erase Temporary Data Files
menu 182
erasing hard disk memory 244
erasing non‑volatile memory 244
erasing volatile memory 243
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB. 295
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 296
Ethernet network
preparing to set up for Ethernet
printing 52
Ethernet port 49
Ethernet setup
preparing for an 52
exporting a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 26
EXT port 49
exterior of the printer
cleaning 247
e‑mail
canceling 117
e‑mail alerts
low supply levels 265
paper jam 265
setting up 265
e‑mail function
setting up 113
e‑mail options
advanced options 119
darkness 118
message 117
original size 117
page setup 119
recipient(s) 117
resolution 117
Save As Shortcut 118
Send As 118
subject 117
e‑mail screen
options 117, 119
E‑mail Settings menu 208
e‑mail shortcuts, creating
using the Embedded Web
Server 114
e‑mail, sending
using a shortcut number 115
using the address book 116
e‑mailing
adding message line 116
adding subject line 116
configuring e‑mail settings 113
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 114
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 114
setting up e‑mail function 113
using a shortcut number 115
using the address book 116
using the printer control
panel 115
F
factory defaults
restoring 267
fax
sending 136
sending at a scheduled
time 136
fax and e‑mail functions
setting up 354
fax and e‑mail functions are not
set up 354
fax log
viewing 138
Fax memory full 296
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
menu 198
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup)
menu 206
fax name, setting 133
fax number, setting 133
fax options
advanced options 142
content source 141
content type 141
darkness 141
delayed send 141
page setup 141
resolution 140
scan preview 141
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
system administrator. 296
fax port 49
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 296
fax setup
country‑ or region‑specific 130
digital telephone service 128
DSL connection 126
standard telephone line
connection 121
VoIP 127
Index 380
Fax Station Name not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 296
Fax Station Number not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 296
fax troubleshooting
caller ID is not shown 350
can receive but not send
faxes 353
can send but not receive
faxes 354
cannot send or receive a
fax 351
faxing
blocking junk faxes 138
canceling a fax job 139
changing resolution 137
configuring the printer to
observe daylight saving
time 134
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 137
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 137
distinctive ring service 133
fax setup 120
forwarding faxes 140
holding faxes 139
making a fax lighter or
darker 138
sending a fax at a scheduled
time 136
sending using the printer
control panel 134
setting the date and time 134
setting the fax number 133
setting the outgoing fax
name 133
viewing a fax log 138
FCC notices 365, 370
file name
scan options 148
finding more information about
the printer 9
finding printer IP address 20
finisher
supported paper types and
weights 90
supported sizes 90
Finishing menu 226
firmware card 27
flash drive
printing from 96
Flash Drive menu 218
flash drives
supported file types 97
font sample list
printing 99
Forms and Favorites
setting up 22
forwarding faxes 140
FTP
FTP options 148
FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 144
FTP address, scanning to
using a shortcut number 145
using the printer control
panel 144
FTP options
advanced options 149
FTP 148
FTP Settings menu 214
G
General Settings menu 186
Google Cloud Print
using 95
green settings
Eco‑Mode 239
Hibernate mode 240
Quiet Mode 239
H
hardware options, adding
print driver 52
held jobs 98
printing from a Macintosh
computer 99
printing from Windows 99
held print jobs
printing from a Macintosh
computer 99
printing from Windows 99
Help menu 237
Hibernate mode
using 240
hiding icons on the home
screen 21
holding faxes 139
hole punch box
emptying 249
home screen
customizing 21
hiding icons 21
showing icons 21
home screen applications
configuring 22
finding information 22
home screen buttons and icons
description 16
HTML menu 235
I
icons on the home screen
hiding 21
showing 21
identifying jam locations 271
Image menu 236
imaging unit
ordering 253
Imaging unit low [84.xy] 296
Imaging unit nearly low
[84.xy] 297
Imaging unit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 297
importing a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 26
Incompatible output bin [x]
[59] 297
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 297
Incorrect paper size, open [paper
source] [34] 297
individual settings information
erasing 244
initial fax setup 120
using the Embedded Web
Server 120
Insert hole punch box 297
Insert staple cartridge 297
Insert Tray [x] 298
inserting a header or footer 109
Install bin [x] 298
Install Tray [x] 298
installing an Internal Solutions
Port 34
installing an optional card 32
installing internal options
order of installation 46
installing printer hard disk 39
Index 381
installing the printer software 51
Insucient memory to collate job
[37] 298
Insucient memory to support
Resource Save feature [35] 298
Insucient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 298
Insucient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored [37] 299
internal options 27
internal options, adding
print driver 52
internal print server
troubleshooting 316
Internal Solutions Port
installing 34
troubleshooting 316
IP address of computer
finding 20
IP address, printer
finding 20
IPv6 menu 170
J
jams
avoiding 268
jams, clearing
front cover 273
in automatic document
feeder 286
in the duplex unit 281
in the multipurpose feeder 283
in the standard bin 280
in trays 282
mailbox 284
rear door 276
staple access door 289
staple finisher 288
Job Accounting menu 229
L
labels, paper
tips 84
letterhead
copying on 103
loading, 2100‑sheet tray 68
loading, multipurpose
feeder 75, 84
loading, trays 58, 84
Lexmark Mobile Print
using 95
light, indicator 15
line filter 126
LINE port 49
linking trays 81, 82
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 299
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name] [paper
orientation] 299
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 299
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 299
Load multipurpose feeder with
[custom string] [paper
orientation] 299
Load multipurpose feeder with
[custom type name] [paper
orientation] 300
Load multipurpose feeder with
[paper size] [paper
orientation] 300
Load multipurpose feeder with
[paper type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 300
Load staples 300
loading
2100‑sheet tray 68
card stock 75
envelopes 75
letterhead in 2100‑sheet
tray 68
letterhead in multipurpose
feeder 75
letterhead in trays 58
multipurpose feeder 75
optional 550‑sheet tray 58
standard 550‑sheet tray 58
transparencies 75
loading letterhead
paper orientation 84
M
maintenance kit
ordering 252
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 300
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 301
Maintenance kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 301
making copies using paper from
selected tray 104
memory
types installed on printer 243
memory card 27
installing 31
Memory full [38] 301
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 301
menu settings page
printing 57
menus
Active NIC 166
AppleTalk 171
Bin Setup 163
Confidential Print 181
Configure MP 152
Copy Settings 194
Custom Bin Names 162
Custom Names 161
Custom Scan Sizes 162
Custom Types 161
Default Source 152
diagram of 151
Edit Security Setups 179
Erase Temporary Data Files 182
E‑mail Settings 208
Fax Mode (Analog Fax
Setup) 198
Fax Mode (Fax Server
Setup) 206
Finishing 226
Flash Drive 218
FTP Settings 214
General Settings 186
Help 237
HTML 235
Image 236
IPv6 170
Job Accounting 229
Miscellaneous Security
Settings 180
Network [x] 166
Network Card 168
Network Reports 168
OCR Settings 224
Paper Loading 160
Paper Size/Type 153
Paper Texture 156
Paper Weight 158
Parallel [x] 173
PCL Emul 233
Index 382
PDF 232
PostScript 232
Quality 228
Reports 165
Security Audit Log 182
Serial [x] 175
Set Date/Time 184
Settings 225
SMTP Setup 178
Standard Network 166
Standard USB 172
Substitute Size 156
TCP/IP 168
Universal Setup 163
Utilities 231
Wireless 170
XPS 232
menus diagram 151
message
e‑mail options 117
Miscellaneous Security Settings
menu 180
Misfeed cleared, extra sheets in
output bin [24y.xx] 301
mobile device
printing from 95
Mopria Print Service
using 95
moving the printer 10, 263, 264
Multi Send
adding a profile 24
setting up 24
multipurpose feeder
loading 75
MyShortcut
about 23
N
Network [x] menu 166
Network [x] software error
[54] 301
Network Card menu 168
Network Reports menu 168
network settings
Embedded Web Server 265
network setup page
printing 57
Networking Guide
where to find 265
No analog phone line connected
to modem, fax is disabled. 301
noise emission levels 365
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see
User’s Guide [33.xy] 301
non‑volatile memory 243
erasing 244
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources [52] 302
notices 365, 366, 367, 368,
369, 370, 372, 373, 374
number of remaining pages
estimate 251
O
OCR Settings menu 224
optional 550‑sheet tray
loading 58
optional card
installing 32
options
550‑sheet tray, installing 46
firmware cards 27
Internal Solutions Port,
installing 34
memory card 27, 31
printer hard disk, installing 39
printer hard disk, removing 44
options, copy screen
copy from 110
scale 111
options, touch‑screen
copy 110
e‑mail 117, 119
ordering
imaging unit 253
maintenance kit 252
staple cartridges 253
ordering supplies
toner cartridges 251
organizing cables 49
original size
e‑mail options 117
scan options 148
output file type
changing 116
scan image 148
output options
supported paper sizes 90
supported paper types and
weights 90
P
page setup
e‑mail options 119
fax options 141
scan options 149
paper
characteristics 85
dierent sizes, copying 104
letterhead 86
preprinted forms 86
recycled 86
saving 108
selecting 86
storing 85, 88
unacceptable 86
Universal size setting 58
using recycled 238
Paper changes needed 302
paper characteristics 85
paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after jam is
cleared 319
paper jam in the automatic
document feeder 286
paper jam in the duplex unit 281
paper jam in the front cover 273
paper jam in the mailbox 284
paper jam in the multipurpose
feeder 283
paper jam in the rear door 276
paper jam in the staple
finisher 288
paper jam, clearing
front cover 273
in the duplex unit 281
in the multipurpose feeder 283
mailbox 284
rear door 276
staple access door 289
staple finisher 288
paper jams
avoiding 268
locations 271
paper jams, clearing
in automatic document
feeder 286
in the standard bin 280
in trays 282
Paper Loading menu 160
paper size
setting 58
Index 383
Paper Size/Type menu 153
paper sizes
supported by the printer 88
Paper Texture menu 156
paper type
setting 58
paper types
supported by printer 90
Paper Weight menu 158
paper weights
supported by printer 90
Parallel [x] menu 173
Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 302
parts
checking status 250
checking, from printer control
panel 250
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 250
using genuine Lexmark 251
PCL Emul menu 233
PDF menu 232
Personal Identification Number
method
using 54
phone splitter 127
photos
copying 102
placing separator sheets
between copies 107
port settings
configuring 56
PostScript menu 232
power cord socket 49
preparing to set up the printer on
an Ethernet network 52
print driver
hardware options, adding 52
print irregularities 335
print job
canceling from the
computer 100
print quality
cleaning the scanner glass 248
print quality troubleshooting
blank pages 333
characters have jagged
edges 328
clipped pages or images 328
compressed images appear on
prints 329
gray background on prints 330
horizontal voids appear on
prints 331
print irregularities 335
print is too dark 336
print is too light 338
printer is printing solid black
pages 334
repeating defects appear on
prints 339
shadow images appear on
prints 340
skewed print 340
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 341
streaked vertical lines 342
toner fog or background
shading appears on prints 344
toner rubs o 344
toner specks appear on
prints 345
transparency print quality is
poor 345
uneven print density 345
white streaks 346
print troubleshooting
confidential and other held
documents do not print 320
envelope seals when
printing 321
error reading flash drive 321
incorrect characters print 322
incorrect margins on prints 332
jammed pages are not
reprinted 318
job prints from wrong tray 322
job prints on wrong paper 322
jobs do not print 324
Large jobs do not collate 323
multiple‑language PDF files do
not print 323
paper curl 333
paper frequently jams 319
print job takes longer than
expected 326
tray linking does not work 327
unexpected page breaks
occur 327
printer
basic model 12
fully configured 12
minimum clearances 10
moving 10, 263, 264
selecting a location 10
shipping 264
printer configurations 12
printer control panel 15
adjusting brightness 241
factory defaults, restoring 267
indicator light 15
Sleep button light 15
Printer had to restart. Last job
may be incomplete. 302
printer hard disk
disposing of 243
encrypting 245
installing 39
removing 44
wiping 244
printer hard disk encryption 245
printer hard disk memory
erasing 244
printer information
where to find 9
printer IP address
finding 20
printer is printing blank
pages 333
printer messages
Cartridge low [88.xy] 292
Cartridge nearly low
[88.xy] 292
Cartridge very low, [x] estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 292
Cartridge, imaging unit
mismatch [41.xy] 292
Change [paper source] to
[custom string] load
[orientation] 292
Change [paper source] to
[custom type name] load
[orientation] 292
Change [paper source] to
[paper size] load
[orientation] 293
Change [paper source] to
[paper type] [paper size] load
[orientation] 293
Check tray [x] connection 293
Close door or insert
cartridge 293
Close finisher rear door 294
Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job
[2yy.xx] 294
Index 384
Close rear door 294
Close top access cover 294
Complex page, some data may
not have printed [39] 294
Configuration change, some
held jobs were not restored
[57] 294
Defective flash detected
[51] 295
Disk full 62 295
Disk full, scan job canceled 295
Disk must be formatted for use
in this device 295
Disk near full. Securely clearing
disk space. 295
Empty the hole punch box 295
Error reading USB drive.
Remove USB. 295
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 296
Fax memory full 296
Fax partition inoperative.
Contact system
administrator. 296
Fax server 'To Format' not set
up. Contact system
administrator. 296
Fax Station Name not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 296
Fax Station Number not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 296
Imaging unit low [84.xy] 296
Imaging unit nearly low
[84.xy] 297
Imaging unit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 297
Incompatible output bin [x]
[59] 297
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 297
Incorrect paper size, open
[paper source] [34] 297
Insert hole punch box 297
Insert staple cartridge 297
Insert Tray [x] 298
Install bin [x] 298
Install Tray [x] 298
Insucient memory to collate
job [37] 298
Insucient memory to support
Resource Save feature
[35] 298
Insucient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 298
Insucient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored
[37] 299
Load [paper source] with
[custom string] [paper
orientation] 299
Load [paper source] with
[custom type name [paper
orientation] 299
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 299
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 299
Load multipurpose feeder with
[custom string] [paper
orientation] 299
Load multipurpose feeder with
[custom type name] [paper
orientation] 300
Load multipurpose feeder with
[paper size] [paper
orientation] 300
Load multipurpose feeder with
[paper type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 300
Load staples 300
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 300
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 301
Maintenance kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 301
Memory full [38] 301
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 301
Misfeed cleared, extra sheets in
output bin [24y.xx] 301
Network [x] software error
[54] 301
No analog phone line
connected to modem, fax is
disabled. 301
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see
User’s Guide [33.xy] 301
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources
[52] 302
Paper changes needed 302
Parallel port [x] disabled
[56] 302
Printer had to restart. Last job
may be incomplete. 302
Reattach bin [x] 303
Reattach bins [x] – [y] 303
Reinstall missing or
unresponsive cartridge
[31.xy] 304
Remove defective disk [61] 304
Remove packaging material,
[area name] 304
Remove paper from [linked set
bin name] 304
Remove paper from all
bins 304
Remove paper from bin [x] 304
Remove paper from standard
output bin 304
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 304
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 305
Replace cartridge, printer region
mismatch [42.xy] 305
Replace defective imaging unit
[31.xy] 305
Replace imaging unit, 0
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 305
Replace jammed originals if
restarting job. 306
Replace last scanned page and
jammed originals if restarting
job. 306
replace maintenance kit to
resume printing [80.xy] 306
replace maintenance kit,
recommended life exceeded
[80.xy] 306
Replace missing cartridge
[31.xy] 306
replace missing fuser
[80.xx] 306
Replace missing imaging unit
[31.xy] 307
Replace roller kit [81.xx] 307
Replace separator pad 307
Index 385
Replace unsupported cartridge
[32.xy] 307
Replace unsupported imaging
unit [32.xy] 307
Replace wiper 308
Restore held jobs? 308
Scan document too long 308
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 308
Scanner disabled by admin
[840.01] 308
Scanner disabled. Contact
system administrator if
problem persists.
[840.02] 309
Scanner jam access cover
open 309
Scanner jam, open and close
automatic feeder top cover
[2yy.xx] 309
Scanner jam, remove all
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 309
Scanner jam, remove jammed
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 309
Scanner maintenance required
soon, use ADF Kit [80] 309
Serial port [x] disabled [56] 309
SMTP server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 309
Some held jobs were not
restored 310
Standard network software
error [54] 310
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 310
Supply needed to complete
job 310
The device is operating in safe
mode. Some print options may
be disabled or provide
unexpected results. 310
Too many bins attached
[58] 310
Too many disks installed
[58] 311
Too many flash options installed
[58] 311
Too many trays attached
[58] 311
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 311
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 311
Unsupported disk 311
Unsupported option in slot [x]
[55] 312
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 296
USB port [x] disabled [56] 312
Weblink server not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 312
printer options troubleshooting
internal option is not
detected 315
internal print server 316
Internal Solutions Port 316
tray problems 317
USB/parallel interface card 318
printer parts
controller board 27
printer problems, solving
basic 312
printer security
information on 246
printer software, installing 51
printing
canceling, from the printer
control panel 100
directory list 100
font sample list 99
forms 94
from a computer 94
from a mobile device 95
from flash drive 96
menu settings page 57
network setup page 57
printing a directory list 100
printing a font sample list 99
printing a menu settings page 57
printing a network setup
page 57
printing forms 94
printing from a flash drive 96
printing held jobs
from a Macintosh computer 99
from Windows 99
printing slows down 324
publications
where to find 9
Push Button Configuration
method
using 54
Q
Quality menu 228
Quiet Mode 239
R
Reattach bin [x] 303
Reattach bins [x] – [y] 303
recipient(s)
e‑mail options 117
recycled paper
using 86, 238
recycling
Lexmark packaging 241
Lexmark products 241
toner cartridges 242
reducing a copy 106
reducing noise 239
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
cartridge [31.xy] 304
Remote Operator Panel
setting up 25
Remove defective disk [61] 304
Remove packaging material,
[area name] 304
Remove paper from [linked set
bin name] 304
Remove paper from all bins 304
Remove paper from bin [x] 304
Remove paper from standard
output bin 304
removing printer hard disk 44
repeat print jobs 98
printing from a Macintosh
computer 99
printing from Windows 99
repeating defects appear on
prints 339
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 304
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 305
Replace cartridge, printer region
mismatch [42.xy] 305
Replace defective imaging unit
[31.xy] 305
Index 386
Replace imaging unit, 0
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 305
Replace jammed originals if
restarting job. 306
Replace last scanned page and
jammed originals if restarting
job. 306
replace maintenance kit to
resume printing [80.xy] 306
replace maintenance kit,
recommended life exceeded
[80.xy] 306
Replace missing cartridge
[31.xy] 306
replace missing fuser [80.xx] 306
Replace missing imaging unit
[31.xy] 307
Replace roller kit [81.xx] 307
Replace separator pad 307
Replace unsupported cartridge
[32.xy] 307
Replace unsupported imaging
unit [32.xy] 307
Replace wiper 308
replacing a staple cartridge 262
replacing supplies
staple cartridge 262
replacing the toner
cartridge 255, 258
reports
viewing 266
Reports menu 165
reserve print jobs 98
printing from a Macintosh
computer 99
printing from Windows 99
resolution
e‑mail options 117
fax options 140
scan options 148
resolution, fax
changing 137
Restore held jobs? 308
restoring factory default
settings 267
RJ11 adapter 130
S
safety information 7, 8
Save As Shortcut
copy options 112
e‑mail options 118
scan options 148
saving paper 108
Scan document too long 308
scan image
output file type 148
scan options
darkness 148
file name 148
original size 148
page setup 149
resolution 148
Save As Shortcut 148
Scan Preview 149
Send As 148
Scan Preview
scan options 149
scan preview
fax options 141
scan screen
content source 149
content type 149
Scan to Computer
setting up 147
Scan to Network
setting up 24
using 143
scan troubleshooting
cannot scan from a
computer 355
partial document or photo
scans 356
scan job was not
successful 357
scanner unit does not
close 350, 358
scanning takes too long or
freezes the computer 358
scanner
Automatic document feeder
(ADF) 14
functions 13
scanner glass 14
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 308
Scanner disabled by admin
[840.01] 308
Scanner disabled. Contact
system administrator if problem
persists. [840.02] 309
scanner glass
cleaning 248
copying using 102
Scanner jam access cover
open 309
Scanner jam, open and close
automatic feeder top cover
[2yy.xx] 309
Scanner jam, remove all originals
from the scanner [2yy.xx] 309
Scanner jam, remove jammed
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 309
Scanner maintenance required
soon, use ADF Kit [80] 309
scanning
from a flash drive 147
quick copy 101
to a computer using the
Embedded Web Server 146
to an FTP address 144, 145
scanning to a computer 147
using the Embedded Web
Server 146
scanning to a flash drive 147
scanning to an FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
computer 143
using a shortcut number 145
using the address book 145
using the printer control
panel 144
scanning to network
destinations 143
security
modifying confidential print
settings 99
Security Audit Log menu 182
security settings information
erasing 244
security Web page
printer security information 246
selecting a location for the
printer 10
selecting paper 86
Send As
e‑mail options 118
scan options 148
sending a fax using the
computer 135
sending a fax using the printer
control panel 134
sending an e‑mail using the
printer control panel 115
Index 387
sending fax
using shortcuts 135
using the address book 136
sending fax at a scheduled
time 136
sending fax using the address
book 136
Serial [x] menu 175
Serial port [x] disabled [56] 309
serial printing
setting up 56
Set Date/Time menu 184
setting
paper size 58
paper type 58
TCP/IP address 168
setting the fax number 133
setting the outgoing fax
name 133
setting the Universal paper
size 58
setting up e‑mail alerts 265
setting up fax
country‑ or region‑specific 130
digital telephone service 128
DSL connection 126
standard telephone line
connection 121
VoIP connection 127
setting up fax and e‑mail
functions 354
setting up serial printing 56
Settings menu 225
shipping the printer 264
shortcuts, creating
copy screen 103
e‑mail 114
fax destination 137
FTP address 144
FTP destination 143
showing icons on the home
screen 21
sides (duplex)
copy options 111
Sleep Mode
adjusting 240
SMTP server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 309
SMTP Setup menu 178
Some held jobs were not
restored 310
standard 550‑sheet tray
loading 58
Standard Network menu 166
Standard network software error
54] 310
standard tray
loading 58
Standard USB menu 172
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 310
staple cartridge
replacing 262
staple cartridges
ordering 253
staple jam in the finisher 289
statement of volatility 243
status of parts
checking 250
status of supplies
checking 250
storing
paper 88
supplies 254
storing print jobs 98
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 341
streaked vertical lines appear on
prints 342
streaks appear 346
subject and message
information
adding to e‑mail 116
Substitute Size menu 156
supplies
checking status 250
checking, from printer control
panel 250
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 250
conserving 238
storing 254
using genuine Lexmark 251
using recycled paper 238
supplies, ordering
imaging unit 253
maintenance kit 252
staple cartridges 253
toner cartridges 251
Supply needed to complete
job 310
supply notifications
configuring 266
supported flash drives 97
supported paper sizes 88, 90
supported paper types 90
supported paper types and
weights 90
supported paper weights 90
T
TCP/IP menu 168
telecommunication
notices 370, 372, 373
The device is operating in safe
mode. Some print options may
be disabled or provide
unexpected results. 310
the scanner does not
respond 359
tips
card stock 83
labels, paper 84
on using envelopes 83
on using letterhead 84
transparencies 85
tips on using envelopes 83
tips on using letterhead 84
toner cartridge
replacing 255, 258
toner cartridges
ordering 251
recycling 242
toner darkness
adjusting 94
Too many bins attached [58] 310
Too many disks installed [58] 311
Too many flash options installed
[58] 311
Too many trays attached [58] 311
touch screen
buttons 18
transparencies
copying on 102
loading 75
tips 85
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 311
trays
linking 81, 82
unlinking 81, 82
troubleshooting
an application error has
occurred 360
Index 388
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 360
checking an unresponsive
printer 312
fax and e‑mail functions are not
set up 354
solving basic printer
problems 312
the scanner does not
respond 359
troubleshooting, copy
copier does not respond 347
partial document or photo
copies 347
poor copy quality 348
poor scanned image
quality 356
scanner unit does not
close 350, 358
troubleshooting, display
printer display is blank 314
troubleshooting, fax
caller ID is not shown 350
can receive but not send
faxes 353
can send but not receive
faxes 354
cannot send or receive a
fax 351
troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after jam is
cleared 319
troubleshooting, print
confidential and other held
documents do not print 320
envelope seals when
printing 321
error reading flash drive 321
incorrect characters print 322
incorrect margins on prints 332
jammed pages are not
reprinted 318
job prints from wrong tray 322
job prints on wrong paper 322
jobs do not print 324
Large jobs do not collate 323
multiple‑language PDF files do
not print 323
paper curl 333
paper frequently jams 319
print job takes longer than
expected 326
tray linking does not work 327
unexpected page breaks
occur 327
troubleshooting, print quality
blank pages 333
characters have jagged
edges 328
clipped pages or images 328
compressed images appear on
prints 329
gray background on prints 330
horizontal voids appear on
prints 331
print irregularities 335
print is too dark 336
print is too light 338
printer is printing solid black
pages 334
repeating defects appear on
prints 339
shadow images appear on
prints 340
skewed print 340
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 341
streaked vertical lines 342
toner fog or background
shading appears on prints 344
toner rubs o 344
toner specks appear on
prints 345
transparency print quality is
poor 345
uneven print density 345
white streaks on a page 346
troubleshooting, printer options
internal option is not
detected 315
internal print server 316
Internal Solutions Port 316
tray problems 317
USB/parallel interface card 318
troubleshooting, printing
printing slows down 324
troubleshooting, scan
cannot scan from a
computer 355
partial document or photo
scans 356
scan job was not
successful 357
scanner unit does not
close 350, 358
scanning takes too long or
freezes the computer 358
U
understanding the home screen
buttons and icons 16
uneven print density 345
Unformatted
flash
detected
[53] 311
Universal paper size
setting 58
Universal Setup menu 163
unlinking trays 81, 82
Unsupported option in slot [x]
[55] 312
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 296
USB port 49
USB port [x] disabled [56] 312
USB/parallel interface card
troubleshooting 318
using a shortcut number
scanning to an FTP address 145
using Forms and Favorites 94
using Hibernate mode 240
using recycled paper 238
using shortcuts
sending fax 135
using the address book 116
sending fax 136
using the touch‑screen
buttons 18
Utilities menu 231
V
verify print jobs 98
printing from a Macintosh
computer 99
printing from Windows 99
vertical voids appear 346
viewing
reports 266
viewing a fax log 138
virtual display
checking, using Embedded Web
Server 265
voice mail
setting up 121
Index 389
voice over Internet Protocol
(VoIP)
fax setup 127
voids appear 346
VoIP adapter 127
volatile memory 243
erasing 243
volatility
statement of 243
W
Weblink server not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 312
wiping the printer hard disk 244
Wireless menu 170
wireless network
configuration information 53
wireless network setup
using the Embedded Web
Server 55
wireless setup wizard
using 54
X
XPS menu 232
Index 390
